Inventory /visma-net-erp/help/inventory section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-overview page The Inventory workspace provides real-time access to stock item availability data configured in accordance with your company policies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory - overview The Inventory workspace provides real-time access to stock item availability data configured in accordance with your company policies. By using the Inventory workspace, you can maintain a perpetual inventory system while also performing physical inventories as full inventories and by cycles. In Visma Net, you can track items by either lot or serial numbers, as well as by expiration dates. By using flexible valuation methods, you can accurately maintain item costs and trace cost flows. Advanced functionality of the workspace includes flexible posting settings and automatic initiation of stock replenishment. ## Stock and non-stock items Items are the goods, products, services, or component parts recorded to and tracked in your system database. Items can be divided into two major categories, stock and non-stock items, based on how they are handled and accounted for. For more information, see the following articles: + [About stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) + [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/) ## Flexible item identifiers and support of alternative IDs By using configurable item IDs, you can uniquely identify stock and non-stock items. You can easily gather additional business-specific data about items by configuring custom fields, called **attributes**. Also, on purchase and sales orders, you can use bar codes, or supplier, or customer alternative IDs to find items or record the item information. For more information, see the following articles: + [About stock and non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) + [About stock item attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-attributes/) + [About item cross-references](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-cross-references/) + [About barcode support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support/) ## Global and item-specific UoMs You can use an unlimited number of units of measure (UoMs) in your system. Commonly used units of measure (UoMs), such as litres, gallons, pounds, kilograms, and conversion rules between UoMS (such as pounds and kilograms) can be defined globally and then used as base units of measure, UoMs, for specific item classes or particular products. You can also define units of measure and conversion rules at the item-class and item level or cases or boxes intended for different products can be of different capacity. Once you have defined conversion rules, the system automatically makes conversions to the correct unit of measure when necessary. For more information, see [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). ## Multiple units of measure If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, for each item you can define, in addition to the base unit, the purchase UoM to be used to measure item quantity on purchase orders and receipts and the sales unit to measure the item quantities on sales orders and invoices. Prices for base UoMs and for sales UoMs can be set as independent prices if needed. For details, see [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). ## Multiple warehouses and locations In Visma Net, you can maintain a complex warehouse structure, defining multiple warehouses with multiple locations within each warehouse. This functionality is enabled by the **Warehouses** and **Warehouse locations** functionalities. By configuring segmentation for location identifiers, you maintain a hierarchy of rooms, rows, levels, shelves, bins, and other divisions. For each location, you can define which inventory operations can be performed there. You can also specify a primary stock item or primary item class, and set up validation so that if a preferred item is specified and the validation is turned on, only it can be received at the location. By using security features, you can restrict access to warehouse information to groups of authorised users. For more information, see the following articles: + [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/) ## Flexible system of defaults and overrides For processing inventory transactions, the item settings specified for a particular warehouse are used. To ease data entry for all possible combinations of item and warehouse, default values can be specified at the item class level and at the item level. The default values help users to save time and reduce the number of input errors. Default settings can be overridden if necessary. ## Flexible posting settings You can choose whether to automatically update the general ledger on release of inventory documents. Posting classes assigned to items define the rules for selecting particular general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be updated when transactions with the items are performed. Reason codes for inventory transactions provide the offset accounts to be updated, depending on the type of inventory transactions. For more information, see the following articles: + [About posting settings](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings/) + [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/) + [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/) ## Inventory transactions The Inventory workspace supports the following types of documents, recording the same-name inventory transactions: receipt, issue, adjustment, transfer, and kit assembly. Inventory documents facilitate accounting for transactions that result in changing inventory quantities. For more information about these inventory transactions, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/) ## Availability calculation Visma Net provides real-time visibility into the available inventory levels. The way availability data is calculated can be configured in accordance with the policies set in your company. Calculation options are specified for item classes and may differ for items assigned to different item classes. The availability data of items is shown on sales orders, purchase orders, and kit assemblies. For more information, see [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). ## Lot and serial number tracking With the Inventory workspace, you can track stock items by lot or serial numbers and by expiration dates if the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and the ability to track different products differently. For more information about the use of lot and serial numbers, see the following articles: + [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/) + [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) ## Kit assembling Some stock or non-stock items may be kits made up of other items. Non-stock kits may include only stock components; stock kits require assembly and may include non-stock components of the labour and expense types. A kit specification contains the list of kit components and can have revisions. If a stock kit will require disassembling, it can be done in accordance with the appropriate revision or the same one that was used to assemble the kit. For more information about kits, see [About accounting for kits](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits/). ## Inventory valuation By using a perpetual inventory system, which Visma Net enables, your company can estimate the total cost of its inventory at any moment, because on-hand quantities and inventory account balances are updated with every transaction, purchase, or sale. Periodic revision of standard costs for items with standard cost valuation methods results in the revaluation of the cost of inventory. Periodic updates of base prices can be performed automatically. For more information on inventory valuation, see the following articles: + [About the cost of inventory](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory/) + [About item costs and valuation methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods/) + [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/) ## Stocktaking counts By using Visma Net, your company can maintain a perpetual inventory system with the combination of full stocktaking counts and cycle counting that best fits the company policies and goals. Count data can be entered simultaneously from multiple computers. The information from these counts provides company managers with exact values of stock levels at any time. For more information, see the following articles: + [About overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) + [About stocktaking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking/) + [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) ## Automated replenishment In Visma Net, you can configure automated replenishment of stock items. Flexible, automated replenishment ensures that for items requiring replenishment the right quantities will be calculated and listed on automatically generated purchase orders. Moreover, you can use the predicted average daily demand, calculated with the help of demand forecasting methods, to periodically update the values of replenishment parametres (such as maximum quantity, reorder point, and safety stock) to more precisely calculate the quantities required for replenishment. For more information, see the following articles: + [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/) + [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/) + [About replenishment methods and their parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-methods-and-their-parameters/) + [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/) ## Other features and options The Inventory workspace also provides the following features: + The ability to quickly add product images to the item record. + Tracking of items by product work group or product manager. + Item availability data displayed when you create a sales or a purchase order. + The ability to print count sheets, tags, and item and location labels to facilitate the counting process. + For perishable items, tracking of expiration dates, with alerts displayed about expired items. + The ability to set up the automatic issue of items by expiration date. + Segmented identifiers for locations, to make it easier to locate stock. By using segments, you can define further detail levels of locations, such as rooms, shelves, and bins.

Related pages

Concepts

Configuration overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/configuration-overview page The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuration overview The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. The Inventory workspace is the first distribution workspace you implement; the Purchases and Sales workspaces use the functionality of the Inventory workspace. The workspaces of Inventory can be adapted to any organisation's workflow, so you can implement virtually any kind of inventory model. Configuring the Inventory workspace will facilitate your organisation's daily operations. ## Prerequisites and dependencies The General ledger workspace must be configured before you implement the Inventory workspace.

Related pages

Concepts

Manage inventory defaults /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory defaults Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage inventory defaults - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/manage-inventory-defaults-overview page To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, Visma Net gives you the ability to set up default values and use them when you create stock and non-stock items and when you record transactions that involve stock and non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory defaults - overview To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, Visma Net gives you the ability to set up default values and use them when you create stock and non-stock items and when you record transactions that involve stock and non-stock items. Any default value you establish can be overridden. For each stock and non-stock item, you can assign appropriate units of measure (UoMs) to measure item quantity, volume, and weight. You can define global UoMs (which are used throughout the system), item-specific UoMs (which are used only for particular items), and conversion rules for units of measure. ## Topics + [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/) + [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/) + [About posting settings](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings/) + [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/) About reason codes: definition and usage /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage page Generally, transactions with items are performed when the items are purchased or sold, and respective inventory receipts or issues are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originating in other workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About reason codes: definition and usage Generally, transactions with items are performed when the items are purchased or sold, and respective inventory receipts or issues are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originating in other workspaces. Because direct inventory transactions (not based on any financial documents) are not standard operations, the users should explain why the particular inventory transactions were performed. Reason codes are used with direct inventory transactions to provide the reasons for such transactions, as well as account / subaccount pairs to be used to post the transactions to general ledger. You define reason codes in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For each reason code, you must specify with what inventory transaction it will be used. You can define the reason codes for the following types of inventory transactions: + Receipt + Issue / return + Adjustment + Transfer > [!NOTE] > Identifiers of reason codes may have up to 10 characters and can clearly designate the reason of the transaction, as with **DAMAGE**, **EXPIRATION**, **SHRINKAGE**, and **RETURNS**. ## Reason code account Each reason code provides an account to be used for the transaction. The type of the account depends on the type of transaction the reason code is associated with as well as the reason for the transaction; in most cases, it is a kind of expense account to record specific costs. For example, reason codes defined for issues are used to provide offset accounts for specific types of issues. If the issue is made for kit assembling, the offset account is usually an expense account like material expense. If the issue is made to remove expired goods, the offset account can be expired goods' costs. An inventory return functions similarly to an issue, with the entries reversed. ## Reason code subaccount and subaccount mask Each reason code provides a subaccount associated with it and a subaccount mask to set up the rule for creating a subaccount for transactions by combining segment values copied from the multiple subaccounts involved including the reason code's subaccount. To create a subaccount mask for a reason code, you can choose subaccount segments from the following sources: I (Item) : A subaccount associated with the item W (Warehouse) : A subaccount associated with the warehouse where the transaction is performed P (Posting class) : A subaccount associated with the posting class R (Reason code) : A subaccount associated with the reason code itself ## Usage of reason codes in inventory When an inventory transaction is performed directly in the Inventory workspace, the reason code defines what account will be used as an offset account and what subaccount will mark the transaction. On release of the transaction, the inventory account (coming from the stock item) and the offset account (from the reason code) will be updated with the amount of the transaction. For each type of inventory transaction, you can select the reason code that is used most frequently and assign it as the default reason code for the transaction type. You specify the default reason codes to be used for different types of inventory transactions on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. You can assign default reason codes to the following inventory transactions: + Receipts + Issue / returns + Adjustment + Stocktaking adjustments When you create one of these inventory documents, the system automatically inserts the appropriate default reason code for the type. You can replace it with another reason code defined for the transaction type if necessary. ## Sales account and sales subaccount Reason codes can only provide a sales account and sales subaccount segment source for sales transactions that refer to a specific order type. You can set this in the **Use sales account from** and **Combine sales sub. from** fields in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

About posting classes: definition and usage /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage page Every inventory transaction creates an appropriate posting to the general ledger, depending on the particular item, the type of transaction, the warehouse location where the item is stocked, and other conditions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About posting classes: definition and usage Every inventory transaction creates an appropriate posting to the general ledger, depending on the particular item, the type of transaction, the warehouse location where the item is stocked, and other conditions. A posting class is a set of rules defining for each item which accounts and subaccounts should be used to post specific transactions to the general ledger. Also, posting classes are used to provide default general ledger accounts for stock and non-stock items on sales and purchase orders. You create posting classes by using the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. The definition of a posting class includes the accounts assigned to the class (specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab) and the settings to be used for transaction posting to general ledger (located on the **Posting settings** tab). ## Default general ledger accounts for items of the class Each posting class has general ledger accounts assigned to it. These accounts will be used in the following ways: + As default general ledger accounts for items assigned to the posting class + As general ledger accounts assigned to the posting class itself as one of the sources for selecting the proper accounts to be used for specific transactions The list of accounts specified for the posting class includes the following accounts: + The inventory ( **Asset** ) account and subaccount to be used to keep the balance of transactions with the stock item assigned to the posting class or the accrual account ( **Expense** ) if the item is a non-stock item + The reason code subaccount to be used to mark direct inventory transactions with the stock item + The sales ( **Income** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item is issued from the inventory for sale (based on sales orders) + The cost of goods sold ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item is issued for sale or the expense account when a non-stock item is sold + The standard cost variance ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item's cost on the purchase receipt differs from the cost on the inventory receipt (for items with the standard cost valuation method assigned) + The standard cost revaluation ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used to record a gain or loss when the standard cost is updated (for items with the standard cost valuation method assigned + The purchase accrual ( **Liability** ) account and subaccount to be used to accrue amounts on purchase receipts related to the stock item + The purchase price variance account and subaccount ( **Expense** ) to be used to record any differences between the item cost on the purchase receipt and the inventory receipt + The landed cost variance account and subaccount ( **Expense** ) to be used to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts on Inventory receipts ## Rules for choosing accounts Accounts and subaccounts for inventory transactions related to sales, purchases and valuation of items can be obtained from the sources, depending on the policies established in your company. For example, if only one inventory account is used in your company for all stock items, you might want to provide very specific subaccounts to track which warehouses were involved in every transaction. In Visma Net, you can choose accounts from the following sources:
Item: The inventory account for all transactions of the item will be the same regardless of where the inventory transaction occurs.
Warehouse: The inventory account will vary depending on the warehouse where the inventory transaction is made.
Posting class: The inventory account assigned to the posting class itself (as specified on the General ledger accounts tab) will be used. This option is helpful when you need to replace the inventory account previously used for items of the posting class with a new account.
> [!NOTE] > for sales orders, the sales account is retrieved according to settings in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. ## Rules for choosing subaccounts Generally, subaccounts to be used for transaction posting can be selected from the same sources as accounts, but since subaccounts consist of multiple segments, you have the option to combine segment values from different sources to get subaccounts that would perfectly reflect all the details of the transaction. A posting class provides the subaccount masks on the **Posting settings** tab, which allows you to configure how the subaccounts should be composed using segment values copied from various sources. Consider a simple example of configuring a subaccount mask for a sales subaccount. Suppose there are four segments in the subaccounts used in your company, which have the format **XX-XXX-XX-XX**. For each segment, you have the choice of three options designating the source of the segment value: + P: Posting class + I: Item + W: Warehouse If you configure the sales subaccount mask as **II-III-II-II**, it means that for sales transactions, the subaccount specified as sales subaccount for the item will be used. If you configure the sales subaccount mask as **WW-PPP-II-PP**, then for sales transactions, the sales subaccount will be a combination of three subaccounts: + The first segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the warehouse, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. + The second and fourth segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the posting class of the item, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. + The third segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the item, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. ## Using posting classes Posting classes facilitate specifying general ledger accounts for multiple items assigned to specific classes. One of the posting classes can be chosen as the default posting class in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Then, when a user creates a new stock item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the item is assigned to the default posting class. If necessary, the user can choose another posting class for the item. Once the posting class is selected, the **General ledger accounts tab** will have the values (intended for general ledger accounts and subaccounts) filled in for the item, based on the posting class. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you choose as the default class the posting class with settings that apply to the largest number of items. Other posting classes can be more specific and contain settings that apply to fewer items. Later, on release on a specific inventory document, the system checks the posting class of each stock item and applies the rules of the item's posting class to determine accounts and subaccounts to be used for the transaction. For example, for each line item in a sales invoice, the system checks the posting class of the stock item, and applies the rules of the item's posting class to determine a sales account and subaccount and a COGS-account and subaccount to be used for the transaction. Depending on whether the **Post summary when updating the general ledger** option is selected on the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, the system generates a batch with journal entries grouped by the account / subaccount pair or with full details. After that, the system generates a batch using the accounts and subaccounts in accordance with the posting classes of the items listed in the document. When the standard costs for the stock items are changed (at the end of financial year or when needed), the process of updating the standard costs generates inventory adjustments to be posted to the general ledger. The system will use the standard cost revaluation account and the corresponding subaccount determined by the rules defined by the posting class of the item whose cost is being updated. If upon release of the purchase receipt, there are differences between the purchase receipt amount and the inventory receipt amount, the following accounts will be used: + For items with the standard cost valuation method, the standard cost variance account and subaccount. + For items with other valuation methods, the purchase price variance account and subaccount. + For all items, the landed cost variance account and subaccount to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts and inventory receipts.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About posting settings /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings page The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About posting settings The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. Depending on the configuration settings selected for the Inventory workspace, the inventory transactions can be automatically posted to the general ledger each time an inventory transaction is released. Posting classes give you great flexibility to create appropriate rules for choosing accounts to be updated in the general ledger by specific inventory transactions. ## Inventory–general ledger integration settings The settings used to configure the level of integration between the Inventory and General ledger workspaces are located on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The following options are available: Update general ledger : If this option is selected, transactions originating in the Inventory workspace will update the general ledger. If this option is cleared, inventory transactions do not update the general ledger, and the inventory can be maintained independently from the General ledger workspace. Post summary when updating the general ledger : If this option is selected, only summary information (for the account / subaccount pair) will be included into the batch. If this option is cleared, the detailed information for each document line will be included in the batch generated for the document. Automatically post on release : If this option is cleared, inventory transactions will not be automatically posted to the general ledger on release of Inventory documents; they should be posted through the General ledger workspace. If this option is selected, inventory transactions will be posted on the release of inventory documents. ## Posting classes A posting class groups stock or non-stock items by the way general ledger accounts are selected for posting specific transactions to the general ledger. The posting class also provides the account and subaccount to be used if the source of general ledger accounts for a transaction is a posting class itself. You create posting classes using the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. You can assign a posting class to an item class as the default posting class for stock items of the item class. You can also assign a posting class to a stock item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and to a non-stock item using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. A posting class defines the rules for selecting general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for transactions with items assigned to the posting class. When a transaction with an item is performed, several similar accounts are involved. For example: When a stock item is received at a particular warehouse, a debit amount can be recorded to either the inventory account associated with the warehouse or the inventory account associated with the item. Subaccounts for various types of transactions can be combined from multiple involved subaccounts depending on the policies established in your organisation. Accounts and subaccount segment values can be chosen from the following sources: + Item + Warehouse + Posting class For more details about using posting classes, see: [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/). ## Reason codes If inventory transactions are generated from the Purchases or Sales workspace, the system will use the purchase accrual account (for purchase receipts) or the COGS account (for sales orders). The offset account and subaccount for a receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer are determined by the document's reason code, which is selected depending on the specific transaction being performed. For different types of inventory transactions, different types of offset accounts should be selected. Reason codes also can be used to gather statistics about specific inventory transactions. You define reason codes in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. Each reason code is associated with the type of inventory transaction it will be used for. For each type of inventory transaction, multiple reason codes can be created if necessary to further categorise transactions within their types. By using the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, you can define the reason codes used most frequently with each type of as the default reason codes for types of transactions. The reason code serves the same two purposes as the posting class does: + To define the sources of the offset subaccount segment values on a per-segment basis + To provide the offset account and offset subaccount, if the source is the reason code itself For more information on using reason codes, see: [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About units of measure and conversions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions page In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About units of measure and conversions In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. Multiple units of measure are required because items can be sold by the piece or grouped into boxes, packages, crates, and so forth. Some units of measure apply to many products and as such are defined globally. Other units of measure are used only for particular products or for groups of similar products. Visma Net allows you to define UoMs and conversion rules at all of these levels, as the sections below describe. ## Global units of measure You use the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window to define units of measure that can be used globally for all items. You can add new units of measure to the unit conversion reference table in this window and specify how they are converted to units already defined in the table if applicable. The global UoMs specified in this table can be used throughout Visma Net, including when a user is selecting default UoMs for a new item class or item. ## Product-specific units of measure If (for each item class, which is defined and modified in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window) the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled, you can specify the base, sales, and purchase units to be used by default for items of the class: Base unit : The unit of measure used for stock keeping and to calculate unit costs. Quantities of the stock item at warehouses are counted using the UoM specified as the base unit for the stock item. Sales unit : The unit of measure typically used when your company sells the product. Purchase unit : The unit of measure typically used when your company purchases the product. You can select globally defined units of measure or type a class-specific UoM. For all units selected for the class, unit conversions are specified with respect to the class' default base unit. In the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) and [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) windows, you can select the base, sales, and purchase units for particular items. (This information is specified on the **General settings** tab of either window.) You can select units from the list of UoMs defined for the class or manually enter units for a particular item. The system will not automatically add item-specific UoMs either globally or for the class. If you want the new units to be available for selection when users create other new items, add them for the class. For a stock item stocked at a particular warehouse, you can select warehouse-specific sales and purchase units by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is disabled in your system, you can use only base units for item classes as well as for individual stock and non-stock items. If you decide at any moment to enable this functionality, the sales and purchase units of each stock and non-stock item will get their values from the currently used base unit of the item. > [!NOTE] > The system will not automatically add class-specific units to the global unit conversion reference table in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. ## Choosing the base unit In general, you may want to choose for each item a base unit that is the smallest unit you would ever use when buying or selling the product, so you can avoid any problems caused by rounding. To understand this guideline, consider a simple example: You purchase and stock a product (canned juice) in boxes of 12 cans, and choose a box as the base unit for this product. If you then decided to sell the product by cans, you will need to specify quantities in fractions or define the sales unit (if sales and purchase units are enabled in your system) as 0.0833333 (one-twelfth) of the base unit. Further, suppose the quantities in your system are calculated up to 3 decimal places, as specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Imagine that one customer wants to buy 5 cans, and another wants to buy another 5 cans. In both cases the sales order will specify 0.417 units (5 \* 0.0833333), and both customers will get 5 cans. The remaining 0.166 units doesn't actually equate to the 2 cans left in the box! During a financial period, in a warehouse, such rounding problems can cause a significant discrepancy between the quantities on books and physical quantities. During stocktaking, counting is performed in base units, so if the base unit for the product is not the smallest UoM applicable to the item, counting results may prove incorrect. Considering the above example, counting only boxes can result in incorrect total number of cans because some of the boxes may not be full. ## Specifying conversion rules If different UoMs are used as base, sales, and purchase units, you specify conversion rules with respect to the UoM chosen as the base unit for the item. For instance, imagine a product is sold to customers by the piece (**PIECE**), making **PIECE** its sales unit. It is stocked in boxes, and each box (**BOX**) includes 6 pieces. The product is purchased from a supplier in containers. Each container (**CONTAINER**) contains 12 boxes, and the purchase unit is **CONTAINER**. As the base unit, you can choose **PIECE** or **BOX**. (The smallest unit is usually chosen.) If you chose **BOX**, you would specify the following conversion rules: |From unit|Multiply / divide|Conversion factor|To unit| |---|---|---|---| |CONTAINER|Multiply|12|BOX| |PIECE|Divide|6|BOX| ## Priority of conversion rules When you enter a transaction and specify the quantity of a stock item and the unit of measure in which the quantity is measured, the system follows the following rules to determine how the specified UoM can be converted to the base unit for cost-of-sold-goods calculation and to sales units for finding the proper price: 1. The system first searches the unit conversion table for the item–warehouse pair. 1. If no unit is found, the system checks the unit conversion table specific for the stock item. 1. If no item is found, the global unit conversion table is searched. ## Units of weight and volume When a third-party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from a supplier to your company or from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company for freight, depending on the weight or volume of the shipment, or set restrictions on the package weight and volume. Landed costs incurred for shipments can be allocated by weight or by volume. To allow the system to automatically calculate the weight and volume of shipments, in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, select a globally defined unit of measure as the measure of weight and another as the measure of volume. For each stock item, you can specify the weight (measured in weight UoMs) and the volume (measured in volume UoMs) of its base unit on the **Packaging** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About units of weight and volume /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-weight-and-volume page When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About units of weight and volume When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. The carrier may also set restrictions on the weight or volume of packages. Landed costs incurred for shipments delivered from suppliers to your company can be allocated by the weight or volume of the items in the shipment. In Visma Net, you can select the base units of measure for weight and volume and set up the automatic calculation of weights and volumes for sales and purchase orders. ## The base weight and volume UoMs In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, you should create a unit of measure (UoM) to be used in your system as the base UoM for weight. The weights of all sales and purchase orders will be calculated in this UoM. However, if the items differ in weight significantly, you can create other UoMs for measuring the weights of the base units of stock and non-stock items. For each additional weight UoM, you must specify the rules for converting this UoM to the base weight UoM. In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, you should define a UoM that will be used in your system to measure the volume that specific quantities of the items listed on sales and purchase orders can take. Define all other UoMs that may be used to measure the volumes that the base units of various items can take and specify the conversion factors with respect to the base volume UoM. In the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, select the base weight UoM in the **Weight UoM** field and select the base volume UoM in the **Volume UoM** field. ## Weight and volume of stock items For each stock item, you can specify the weight (measured in a specific weight UoM) and the volume (measured in a specific volume UoM) of its base unit on the **Packaging** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. For non-stock items, you can specify such values (if applicable) by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. For the item-specific weight and volume UoMS there must be rules for conversion to the appropriate base UoMs specified either in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window or in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in your system, make sure that rules for converting each sales and purchase unit to the base UoM selected for the item are defined in the system. Also, if the **Use a price adjustment multiplier** check box is selected on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can specify a price adjustment multiplier for the item. ## Weight and volume calculation for sales orders With the base weight and volume UoMs selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window and with weights and volumes of the base units of the items specified in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the system can calculate the weight and volume of the ordered quantities of stock items for each sales order. For each item, its quantity specified in the sales units is calculated in the base units and multiplied by the weight of the base unit. You can view the weight and volume totals for the order on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The freight rates are specified for shipping zones based on the total shipment weight and (optionally) volume. The weight of a shipment is compared to break points, and the first one that is less than the shipment weight provides the freight rate. The system calculates the freight cost based on the calculation method, **Per unit** or **Net**. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in your system, the system uses the packaging options specified in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window and the items' weight and volume to determine the packages (that is, the set of boxes) for each shipment. ## Weight and volume calculation for purchase receipts The system can calculate the weight and volume of the received quantities of stock and non-stock items for each purchase receipt. The landed cost specified for each purchase receipt can be split over the items listed in the receipt in proportion to the item weights or volumes (among other options).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Define weight UoMs /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/define-weight-uoms section You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the Units of measure (CS203100) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define weight UoMs You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the Units of measure (CS203100) window. For more information: [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/). You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. For the example illustrated in this procedure, we will create weight UoMs for a gram (**GRAM**) and pound (**LB**) and define conversion rules to convert the weights measured in pounds to weights measured in grams and to convert the weights measured in grams to weights measured in pounds. ## Create a new UoM 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, type a name for the new unit, such as **GRAM**. 1. In the **To unit** column, type the name of the new UoM that you specified in the **From unit** column ( **GRAM** in this example). 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion Factor** column, type **1.0** 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). For this example, repeat the steps above to create the **LB** (pound) UoM. ## Specify the conversion rule from LB to GRAM 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, select **LB**. 1. In the **To unit** column, select **GRAM**. 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion factor** column, type **453.5923**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Specify the conversion rule from GRAM to LB 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, select **GRAM**. 1. In the **To unit** column, select **LB**. 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion factor** column, type **0.0022046**. > [!NOTE] > Here we specified the conversion factor as 0.0022046 with 7 decimal places. This value shows how many pounds one gram contains. In your system, the decimal precision is defined in the **Quantity decimal places** field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. Make sure that the selected decimal precision does not cut off any meaningful digits. For instance, if we set the number of decimal places for quantities to 2, this would result in incorrect conversions from grams to pounds. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stock and non-stock items Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage stock and non-stock items - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items-overview page Inventory, an important asset for any business, encompasses the finished goods and raw materials that 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stock and non-stock items - overview Inventory, an important asset for any business, encompasses the finished goods and raw materials that + cost money, + have value, and + are stored and used in the business. These goods or products are generally referred to as **stock items**. Along with stock items, businesses may sell **non-stock items** or non-physical goods, such as services and warranties, that are not stocked and **kits** that include other stock and non-stock items. About the hierarchy of item classes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-the-hierarchy-of-item-classes section In Visma Net, item classes are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the hierarchy of item classes In Visma Net, item classes are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. The item class: + is a required parameter of a stock item + includes the settings that are used for availability calculation, replenishment, price management, and posting to the general ledger, and + can be used for categorising items. In the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, you can create item classes for stock items as well as for non-stock items of each type that is used in your business. A user specifies an item class when they define a new stock or non-stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window respectively, and the system fills in many values, thus saving users time and increasing the accuracy of the entered data. ## Planning the item class hierarchy The structure of item class IDs is defined by the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, which you can review and modify in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. This segmented key has a hierarchical structure which means that each segment of the segmented key defines the hierarchical level. You can review the item class hierarchy in the **Item class tree** pane in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. In this pane, you will be able to see if an item class is made up of one or more levels by the way the tree is structured. After you have defined the structure of the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, the system shows the mask that corresponds to this structure in any field that requires the user to enter an item class ID. Here is an example of what a mask for the item class ID with three segments of two symbols each looks like: **-**-**. Segments that are not yet specified are denotated with *****. You can change the default character (**-**) that separates the segments in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. The following diagram shows examples of different levels of item class hierarchy. ![IN_CON_ItemClassDiagram](/media/visma-net-erp/IN_CON_ItemClassDiagram.png)
IF the INITEMCLASS segmented key THEN
has one segment the item classes will have a plain structure with no nested levels. (See Example 1 on the diagram.)
has two or more segments

each segment after the first segment defines a subsequent level of hierarchy.

Note: Item classes that have the second segment specified are displayed at the second level of hierarchy.

An item class segment of the second level directly refers to the parent item class segment of the first level. That is, under different parent item classes, you can create child item classes with the same ID of the second segment but different settings; see **20-10 (Technical literature)** and **30-10 (Paper)** in Example 2 on the diagram above. By adding more segments to the segmented key, you can expand your ability to categorise items by item classes. For instance, you could add a third level (see the hierarchy in Example 3 on the diagram above) to make your inventory categorisation even more comprehensive and flexible. By using the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, you can specify as many levels as you need. > [!NOTE] > You can append a new segment to the key at any time; however, we recommend that you carefully plan the structure of the segmented key before you start to create and use item classes. ## Entering item class ID segment values When you create a new item class or enter an item class ID in any appropriate field in the system, you have to specify the needed symbols according to the mask of the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key. If you skip any of the characters in any segment, the system shows \* instead of a blank symbol. When you enter an item class ID, you can either enter each segment value manually, or press **F3** and select the segment value from the list. ### First level segment values For the first segment, only the segment values of the first level of hierarchy are displayed in the selection field. ### Subsequent segment values For each subsequent segment, in the selection list, the system shows the child segment values that are appropriate based on the previous segment or segments selected. > [!NOTE] > The way the system narrows the list of segment values based on previously selected values is defined by the **By segments: Child segment values** option selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window; this option is the default for the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key. ## Mass-updating settings of item classes When you change some settings of a parent item class, they will apply to all newly created item classes of this parent item class, but these changes do not influence the settings of the existing child item classes of this parent item class. To simplify the process and automatically apply the settings of the parent item class to all its child item classes: 1. Go to the parent class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Click **Actions - Apply to children** in the window toolbar. 1. Confirm the action. **Result**: All the item classes of this tree node will have identical settings. ## Reviewing the items of the item class You can review the items that belong to a particular item class in the [Items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) window. ### The left pane The left pane of this window shows the tree of item classes. ### The right panel The right pane of the window offers the following views: + Default view, by selecting the **Only related to the current item class** option button, which shows only the items that belong to the selected item class. + Extended view, by selecting the **Related to the current and child item classes** option button, which shows the items that belong to the selected item class, along with items that belong to all child item classes of the selected item class. + Available connections by entering the ID of a particular item in the **Item ID** field, which will show which item class it belongs to and which other items belong to this item class.

Related pages

Windows

About stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items page This article highlights general information about stock and non-stock items and their processing in Visma Net, and the major differences between them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About stock and non-stock items This article highlights general information about stock and non-stock items and their processing in Visma Net, and the major differences between them. **Stock items** are e.g. the finished goods and raw materials that cost money, have value, and are stored and used in the business. **Non-stock items** are e.g. non-physical goods, such as services and warranties, that are not stocked. Each item has a record in the database that provides information about the type of the item (stock or non-stock); + unique identifier + description + the general ledger accounts used to account for transactions with it + price and cost information, + the various units of measure (UoMs) that apply to it and conversions between UoMs. + additional information required to track the items in the system. ## Item IDs Each stock and non-stock item has a unique identifier in the system. This ID can be just a number, or it can be configured to provide basic information about the type, brand, or use of the item. As with other identifiers in Visma Net, item IDs can be configured using the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. You configure identifiers for stock and non-stock items using the same segmented key: **INVENTORY**. You can define: + how many segments the key will have + what values may be used + whether they are to be validated + whether auto-numbering are to be used in one of the segments Because the same segmented key is used for stock and non-stock items, one segment may be reserved to indicate the type of the item. ## Stock items Stock items are items that you purchase and re-sell to your customers. Stock items may have lot or serial numbers you can use to track them during their lifetime. The system automatically tracks stock items and maintains availability data: + how many base units are on hand + how many are ordered from suppliers + how many are booked to sales orders and shipments You can configure how exactly the availability data is computed, and the data is updated as the item is received, invoiced, adjusted, or transferred. For details, see: [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). Stock items are also tracked by their value, and several valuation methods can be used. Typically, a stock item is an asset until it is sold. Its cost becomes an expense. The system also automatically monitors when the stock level of the item falls below the defined minimum and automatically calculates the quantities required to replenish the stock, based on the demand for the item and the inventory information you have defined for the stock item. For details, see: [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). ## Non-stock items Non-stock items are typically non-physical goods such as: + labour + services + warranties + small repair or installation part + items with very low values that might be hard to track. Supported types of non-stock items are: + **Non-stock item** + **Labour** + **Service** + **Charge** + **Expense** Non-stock kits are not stocked; they are sold as one item with all stock components shipped as one package. Available quantities of non-stock items are not tracked by the system; they are treated as if they are available in any quantity at any time. A line on a sales order that features a non-stock item cannot be back ordered. The list of non-stock items appears when you choose overstock components for kits, labour for contracts, and items on an invoice. Only standard cost valuation method applies to non-stock items. For more information on non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About non-stock item support /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support page Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot be stocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which you do not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About non-stock item support Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot be stocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which you do not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required. Many stores sell items that can’t be found on their shelves, such as product warranties, or services such as product assembly, installation, or customisation. Some items are obviously non-stock, such as labour rates and services, but the decision about whether to consider other items (such as gift-wrapping) stock or non-stock depends on the company's inventory policies and other conditions. In the system, non-stock items are handled differently from stock items kept in warehouses. For stock items, the Inventory workspace maintains all cost, quantity, sales, and cost-of-goods-sold information. Since non-stock items do not require tracking of quantities, the Inventory workspace maintains only standard costs and base price information for them. > [!NOTE] > You can use non-stock items in > > + Supplier ledger > + Customer ledger > + Project > > even if the **Logistics** functionality is not enabled in your system. > > However, you will not be able to define the item classes nor the posting classes for them, and it will not be possible to update their prices and costs in bulk. ## Types of non-stock items Visma Net supports the following types of non-stock items:
Non-stock item A general type of non-stock item generally bought for internal needs or for using in sales but not for selling separately.
Labour or Labour class A non-stock item mostly used as a source of general ledger accounts for recording sales of labour.
Service A non-stock item to designate service fees.
Charge A non-stock item that represents specific type of charges.
Expense A non-stock item that represents specific type of expense.
## Item classes for non-stock items You can create item classes for non-stock items to provide default settings for each type of non-stock items used in your business. With such classes defined, users specify an item class when they use the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window to define a new non-stock item, and the system fills in many values, thus saving time and increasing accuracy. ## Settings for non-stock items Information about non-stock items and their properties is maintained using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window available in the Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Inventory workspaces. The list below describes some of the settings you can provide for a non-stock item using this window:
Item ID Every non-stock item is assigned an unique identifier based on the INVENTORY segmented key. For details on identifier configuration possibilities, see: About stock and non-stock items. For material non-stock items, you can specify a default warehouse and select whether the items require shipping and receipts on purchase.
Units and conversion rules For each non-stock item, you can select the units of measure (UoMs) used as base, sales, and purchase units for the item. You can specify conversion rules for them and for other UoMs used for the item. You select UoMs from the list of those available for the item class or type new UoMs manually. Note that every conversion rule is specified with respect to the UoM chosen as the item’s base unit.
Packaging options If the non-stock item requires shipping, specify the weight of the base unit and the UoM used to measure the weight.
General ledger accounts and subaccounts

Purchases and sales of non-stock items do not affect companies’ assets, so the general ledger accounts and subaccounts used for non-stock items are limited to

  • sales accounts,
  • expense accounts, and
  • accounts required for posting transactions related to kit assembly (if the item is a kit or a kit component).

Corresponding subaccounts are used to detail records within each account.

Note

If receipt is required for a non-stock item, a price variance account and a purchase accrual account are required to record purchases of this non-stock item. When the receipt is matched to the invoice, any price variance for the non-stock item is recorded to the specified price variance account.

You can create posting classes to provide default sales/expense accounts and subaccounts for non-stock items. If a non-stock item has not been assigned to a posting class, the default expense subaccount is generated according to the rule specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Valuation method Only the standard cost method applies to non-stockitems.
Price information For non-stock items of all types, you can specify price classes and assign prices that become effective on specific dates.
## Labour-type non-stock item Non-stock items of the **Labour** type are processed in the system differently from non-stock items of other types. They are used in the Projects and Time and expenses workspaces as a source of accounts to be used in contract and project invoicing. For more information, see [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) ## Non-stock item costs Non-stock items do not affect company's inventory balance. However, to make it possible to enter the non-stock item cost and use it in the non-stock item price calculation, Visma Net enables you to maintain standard costs for non-stock items. The standard costs are determined outside of the system by cost experts, and the values should include some of the indirect and direct costs allocated. Standard costs are defined with respect to the base unit of the non-stock item. Entering cost information By using the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window you can: + Specify the standard cost for a non-stock item as pending cost. + Specify a date when the cost will become effective. + Update standard costs for non-stock items by using the **Update cost** action. The system displays only the last cost and current cost. The historical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. If you want to make similar changes to many or all non-stock (and possibly stock) items, use the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. By using the window, you can enter new costs and compare current and pending costs side-by-side for all items that you select. If you are satisfied with the changes, you can update the current standard costs with the pending standard costs for all items or only selected ones. ## Prices for non-stock items For non-stock items, you can define and maintain a default sales price for each item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, or you can implement different pricing strategies in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. For more information, see: [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/) and [About Sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/about-sales-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About item cross-references /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-cross-references page Cross-reference means you associate an item's internal item ID maintained by your company with an alternative ID used by the supplier or customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item cross-references Cross-reference means you associate an item's internal item ID maintained by your company with an alternative ID used by the supplier or customer. You create cross-references for an item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, the **Cross-references** tab. Cross-referencing: + saves time spent on handling customer and supplier orders, and + helps you avoid costly errors ## Alternative IDs For each stock item, you can provide alternative IDs as used by customers (one ID per customer) and as used by suppliers (one ID per supplier). As a consequence, when you enter a customer's sales order and specify an alternative ID for an item, the system will insert the item ID and item price in the order. Alternative IDs may contain numbers, letters, special characters, and spaces. They are not verified by the system. How alternative IDs are specified depends on whether the partner (the customer or supplier) uses the same classification of items or its classification has more or fewer details than are maintained in Visma Net. In any case, to ensure unique identification by alternative IDs, work out internal rules on specifying alternative IDs. ## Bar codes A bar code + is a machine-readable graphical representation of data that contains information about the product to which the bar code is attached. + can be found om most products that are sold or purchased. + is read by using a special scanner that reads the information encoded in the image. + is converted into alphanumeric strings by a Scanner software. + is specific to the company that manufactures or resells the product. Different bar code standards are used for different types of products and in different world regions. With Visma Net: + you can use any bar codes as alternative IDs for items. + bar codes do not require any association with particular supplier or customer, and + they can be entered in any number for the same item. Bar codes can be entered into the system: + on creating a receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, by scanning a bar code of the product and associating it with the item ID used for this product in the system, + by using a scanner in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window ( **Cross-references** tab), or + manually. ## Customer alternative IDs Customer alternative IDs are item identifiers (such as part numbers) used by the customers for the product. In the system, you can: + create multiple alternative IDs for the product (one for each customer), + specify each alternative ID for the item and indicate that it is used by a customer using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, in the **Cross-references** tab, + create alternative IDs (and cross-references) on the fly while specifying the details of the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, and + update an item record by overriding the existing alternative ID. ## Supplier alternative IDs Supplier alternative IDs are item identifiers used by your company's suppliers for the product. As with customer alternative IDs, you can: + maintain multiple supplier alternative IDs in the Inventory workspace, + create alternative IDs on the fly while specifying the details of the purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, and + update an item record by overriding the existing alternative ID. ## Supplier catalogues For items your company frequently purchases from a particular supplier, a supplier catalogue can be maintained in either the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window or the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, under the **Supplier details** tab. Along with alternative IDs, you can specify supplier's last prices for the items and update them with prices quoted on supplier documents such as receipts or even purchase orders. When they create purchase orders, users will be able to see the supplier's last prices for the items listed on the orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About item attributes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-attributes page For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item attributes For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. These properties include the item's + identifier + description + price + cost + units of measure + default warehouse + default supplier information Stock and non-stock items can have additional properties, known as **attributes** in Visma Net, that do not affect item processing in the Inventory workspace but may help your company analyse stock movements or item sales. Attributes may differ for different types of items. ## Types of attributes In the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window, you can decide what attributes are needed, what values are allowed for each, and what control (type of element) is used to implement the attribute on the interface. You can define an attribute as optional or required. This allows items to have no value for the attribute. Alternatively, you can define a special value such as **None** or **N/A** (not applicable) for use with such items. Attributes may be of the following types:
Text: Users can enter any text as the attribute value.
Combo box: The user selects the attribute value from a predefined list that consists of values you specify when you create the attribute. For each value, you specify its ID (such as 1M ), its description (such as Less than 1,000,000 ), and its sort order. Values with smaller sort orders are listed nearer to the top of the combo box list.
Multi select combo: The control will be a list field with a check box against each attribute value so users can select multiple options. The user can enter a list of possible values.
Check box: The attribute is a Boolean value, which means that the user can only select or clear it (such as yes/no, true/false, or on/off ).
Date/time: The user selects a date-time value.
## Attribute assignment You assign attributes at the item class level using the **Attributes** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. The same attribute can be used for one or several item classes. Item class attributes When a user creates a new item and assigns it to an item class by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the system will display the list of attributes assigned to the item's class. All items of the same item class will have the same set of attributes, although their values may differ for different items. For example, if you define a colour attribute for an item class, each item in the class will have this attribute but the items can have different colours or be optional. Because item classes have different lists of attributes, users can have more complete information about each item. You can design custom reports to allow users to analyse information provided by item attributes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About accounting for kits /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits page The sections below discuss general properties of kits and details about stock and non-stock kits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About accounting for kits The sections below discuss general properties of kits and details about stock and non-stock kits. Kits are stock or non-stock items that consist of stock and non-stock items as components and require assembly to become sellable goods. ## General settings about kits In the Inventory workspace of Visma Net, in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window respectively, you can: + enter the properties of a kit, + select the **Is a kit** check box on the **General settings** tab, to indicate that the stock or non stock item is a kit, and + assign pending prices to kits on a per-kit basis on the **Price/cost** tab. To ease the process of creating new kits, you can define an item class for stock kits and another one for non-stock kits. The item class provides default values for settings common to items (kits) of the class. For stock kits, the item class settings might include the assignment of lot or serial numbers and expiration dates to kits and the specification of when they're assigned: on kit production or sale. ## Kit specifications A kit specification lists the components of a kit. You create one in the [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) window, where you can also: + save a modification of a kit specification as a revision that, once created and used, cannot be modified. + use the elements available to allow or disallow changing the quantity of components and adding components to the kit during kit assembly. + specify the minimum and maximum quantities, if adding components is allowed. + use the **Stock components** tab to add stock components to both stock and non-stock kits. For creating kits, only the last revision can be used. For disassembly of a stock kit, if required, select the revision that was used for its assembly. ## Stock and non-stock kits comparison The table below compares stock and non-stock kits. Please note that the attributes of a non-stock kit will apply to a non-stock kit if it includes stock items. |Feature|Stock kit|Non-stock kit| |---|---|---| |Stock components|Yes|Yes| |Non-stock components|Yes|Yes| |Production|May be produced before a sales order requesting them is entered into the system. Production of stock kits (with valuation methods other than the standard cost method) creates a new cost layer.|Not applicable| |Creation and reviewing|The [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window is used to create and view kit assembly documents, for new kits that are assembled and for existing kits that are disassembled.|Not applicable| |On release of a kit assembly document|On-hand quantities of the items used as components are automatically decreased, and the on-hand quantity of the kits is increased.|Not applicable| |On Sales order|One line item appears in the transaction and the on-hand quantity of the kit is reduced.|Stock components on the kit are specified on a pick list and shipped.| |Serial/lot number|Might be required to be assigned on production or on selling, depending on the item class settings.|Not applicable| |Expiration date|Might be required to be assigned on production or on selling, depending on the item class settings.|Not applicable| |Disassembly|May be required when its expiration date has approached. Can be performed in accordance with the revision used to assemble the kit.|Can be performed in accordance with the revision used to assemble the kit.| |Validation of components|No. The calculated quantities can be manually adjusted.|No. The calculated quantities can be manually adjusted.| |Additional costs for assembly|Can be defined as non-stock items.|Not applicable| |Cost valuation method|Average, FIFO, Specific or Standard valuation method.|Only the standard cost valuation may be assigned. Cost is recorded to the expense accrual account specified for the non stock item.| |Standard cost variance account for difference between the standard cost and the cost of actually used components|Yes|Yes| ## Stock kit cost calculation The cost of a stock kit is calculated based on the costs of components when the document is released. The total cost of the kit is: + the total cost of stock components according to the specification's revision, + the cost of components added during assembly, and + the rates of non-stock components of the **Labour** and **Service** types multiplied by their quantities.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Specify default item classes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-default-item-classes page When you create an item class (stock or non-stock) that is the child of any other item class, the system suggests the default settings of the parent class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify default item classes When you create an item class (stock or non-stock) that is the child of any other item class, the system suggests the default settings of the parent class. For the classes at the first level of the item class hierarchy, which have no parent classes that could provide default settings, you can specify the default item classes as follows: 1. Go to the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. 1. In the **Default stock item class** field, select the stock item class or In the **Default non-stock item class** field, select the non-stock item class. These item class settings will be used by default for newly created stock or non-stock item classes. Delete item classes with children /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/delete-item-classes-with-children page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete item classes with children 1. Go to the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Open the item class. 1. Click **Delete** in the window toolbar. When you delete a parent item class, the system asks whether you want to keep the child item classes of this parent. The system proceeds as follows based on your response in the message field:
IF THEN
you click Yes

the system deletes the parent item class and keeps all its the children in the hierarchy.

Result: The children item classes becomes the children of the item class at the level immediately above the deleted item class.

you click No the system deletes the entire tree node of the item class hierarchy (that is, the parent item class along with all of its children item classes).
> [!NOTE] > ** You can delete only those item classes to which no items have been assigned yet.
Move item classes within the hierarchy /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-item-classes-within-the-hierarchy page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Move item classes within the hierarchy 1. Go to the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Click **Actions** in the window toolbar. 1. Select **Change ID**. 1. Click **OK.** **Result**: The item class ID changes, and the system rebuilds the item class hierarchy. Move items to another item class /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-items-to-another-item-class page For a single stock or non-stock item, you can change the item class in the item's settings in the Stock items (IN202500) window and Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Move items to another item class For a single stock or non-stock item, you can change the item class in the item's settings in the Stock items (IN202500) window and Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). If you need to move multiple items to another item class at a time, follow these steps: 1. Go to the [Items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) window. 1. Click the item class to which the items currently belong in the Item class level tree pane. 1. Select the unlabelled check boxes in the rows with the items you want to move. 1. Click the **Cut the selected records** button on the table toolbar of the right pane. **Result**: The system copies the selected rows to the clipboard. 1. In the Item class level tree pane, click the destination item class (the class into which you want to move the selected items). 1. On the table toolbar of the right pane, click the **Paste records** button. **Result**: The system asks whether you want to keep the settings of the moved items. 1. Choose **Yes** or **No** in the message field. 1. If you click **Yes** in the message field, the system updates the settings of the moved items to the settings of the destination item class. 1. If you click **No** in the message field, the system keeps the settings of the moved items unchanged. Create non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/create-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create non-stock items 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Add a unique **Item ID** for the non-stock item. You can use both letters and numbers. > [!NOTE] > You define the requirements for the item in the **Segment keys** window. > [!NOTE] > To change the item ID later, click the **Actions** button and select **Change ID**. 1. In the **Item status** field, select the status of the item. The status **Active** indicates that you can use the item on transactions. 1. Complete the general information on the **General settings** tab. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. If necessary, fill in information on the other tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To register non-stock items faster, use item classes as templates for your work. See: [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Use stock items on projects /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/use-stock-items-on-projects section There are two ways if issuing items in projects: From an existing warehouse location or from a specific project warehouse location. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use stock items on projects There are two ways if issuing items in projects: From an existing warehouse location or from a specific project warehouse location. ## Issue an item from a project-specific warehouse location 1. Create a warehouse location for the project and project task, as described in steps 1 through 3 in: [Link purchase orders to projects](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/link-purchase-orders-to-projects/). 1. Go to the [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) window. 1. Transfer the item(s) that you want to use on your project from your warehouse to the project's warehouse location. 1. After the transfer is finished, you can issue the item(s) to the project. ## Issue an item from an existing warehouse location 1. Go to the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the item, the project, and the project task. 1. Click **Release**. The system now updates the project balance.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Maintain default prices for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain default prices for non-stock items 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the non-stock item whose default price you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Default price** field, enter the default price for the non-stock item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The price you have entered is displayed as the base price for the non-stock item in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. To open the window, select **Sales prices** from the **Inquiries** drop-down list.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Maintain default prices for stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain default prices for stock items 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the stock item whose default price you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Default price** field, enter the default price for the stock item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The price you have entered will be displayed as the base price of the stock item in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) and [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) windows. To open the window, select **Sales prices** or **Supplier prices** from the **Inquiries** drop-down list.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Maintain pending standard costs for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-pending-standard-costs-for-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain pending standard costs for non-stock items 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the non-stock item whose default pending standard cost you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, under the **Standard cost** section, enter the pending cost price for the non-stock item. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. > [!NOTE] > If you do not enter a date, the system uses the current date by default. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Add bar code to stock item /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/add-bar-code-to-stock-item section You can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for stock items to be able to use a scanner to, for example, add the item to a purchase receipt. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add bar code to stock item You can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for stock items to be able to use a scanner to, for example, add the item to a purchase receipt. You can enter bar codes for items manually or by scanning them. The scanner converts the scanned bar code to an alphanumeric string that is immediately visible in the appropriate box as if it had been typed. ## How to add a bar code for a stock item 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. Go to the **Cross-reference** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line. 1. Select **Barcode** in the **Alt. item ID type** column. 1. Enter the bar code in the **Alt. item ID** column, either manually or by using a scanner. Change a stock item's Item ID /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/change-a-stock-item-s-item-id section In the Inventory workspace you can change the Item ID in the following way: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a stock item's Item ID In the Inventory workspace you can change the Item ID in the following way: ## Changing the Item ID 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item for which you want to change the ID. 1. After you have selected the item, click **Actions** and choose **Change ID**. 1. Specify the new ID for the item and click **OK**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Specify standard costs for stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-stock-items page You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items in the Stock items (IN202500) window on the Price/cost information tab, and to override the costs for a particular warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window on the Price/cost information tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify standard costs for stock items You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items in the Stock items (IN202500) window on the Price/cost information tab, and to override the costs for a particular warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window on the Price/cost information tab. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/). 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item you want to specify a standard cost for. 1. Go to the **Price/cost information** tab. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, enter the standard cost to be assigned to the stock item when the costs are updated. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. 1. Save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Specify standard costs for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-non-stock-items page You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window on the Price/cost information tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify standard costs for non-stock items You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window on the Price/cost information tab. For more information: [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item you want to specify a standard cost for. 1. Go to the **Price/cost information** tab. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, enter the standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. 1. Save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage availability data /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage availability data Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage availability data - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/manage-availability-data-overview page Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, which can help you improve customer service by being able to deliver promised items in the needed quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage availability data - overview Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, which can help you improve customer service by being able to deliver promised items in the needed quantities. You can configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company's policies. Also, in Visma Net, you can track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. Some products are tracked because they have expiration dates, while other products must be tracked individually from the manufacturer to the consumer because of safety and warranty issues. ## Topics + [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/) + [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/) + [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) About availability calculation /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation page Quantities of items on hand at warehouses are automatically updated only after the documents that record inventory transactions are released or posted. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About availability calculation Quantities of items on hand at warehouses are automatically updated only after the documents that record inventory transactions are released or posted. ## On hand quantities vs. actual quantities On-hand quantities (also referred to as **book quantities** ) usually differ from actual quantities on hand because during document processing, certain quantities of items can be: + booked on sales orders, + picked for shipping, + returned from customers, + ordered from suppliers, + in transit between warehouses. Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, thus improving customer service. ## Configuration of availability data Configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company's policies. You specify calculation options for each item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## Types of quantities calculated The available quantities of items are calculated at the location level. ### Damaged or returned items Some warehouse locations may hold some quantities of damaged or returned items, and those quantities generally cannot be used for sale and should not be included in the quantities available. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is disabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, all the quantities available for a single default location of each warehouse are included in the availability data. For more information, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ### List of item quantities maintained in the system For each item, the quantities summarised below are maintained in the system and available for viewing on any window where you choose a stock item for adding to the document.
Option Description
Quantity on hand The on-hand quantity is the quantity of items (expressed in the base unit of measure) that are physically in stock and immediately available. The on-hand quantity of items is affected only by released documents.
Quantity not available

For each location in a warehouse, you can specify whether quantities at the location will be included in the quantity available.

For example: Items should not be included in quantities available for locations dedicated to items that are:

  • consigned
  • damaged
  • returned
  • in need of repair.
Total addition and total deduction

The Inventory allocation details (IN402000) inquiry window shows Total addition and Total deduction, which have values calculated based on unreleased documents with various statuses.

Total addition is the quantity of base units of the stock item on:

  • unreleased purchase orders,
  • receipts,
  • incoming transfers.

For each item class, you can specify which of the listed quantities should be included in this value for items of the class.

Total deduction is the quantity of base units of the stock item on:

  • unreleased sales orders,
  • inventory issues,
  • shipments,
  • transfers, and
  • kit assembly documents,
  • plus the non-available quantity.

For each item class, you can specify which of the listed quantities should be included in the total deduction quantity for items of the class in accordance with policies established in your organization.

Quantity available

For each item, the quantity available is calculated as Quantity on hand + Total addition - Total deduction.

This value is calculated in accordance with the options selected in the Item class window for the item class.

Quantity available for shipping

This quantity is calculated by the system as the on-hand quantity with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

This calculation is not affected by any options selected by users.

## Allowing negative item quantity If the **Allow negative quantity** check box is selected in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, Visma Net allows a negative on-hand quantity for items of the class. Warnings are issued on transactions that will result in negative inventory quantities. Location-level negative quantity can occur due to: + errors on inventory documents + incorrect quantities specified or wrong locations + delayed release of receipt or transfer documents confirming the actual arrival of goods. Stocktaking count can be undertaken for items with negative on-hand quantities. ## Option to include quantity as available at location If the **Include in qty. available** option is selected for the location in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window, the quantities available at the location will be added to the quantity available. If the option is not selected, those quantities will be added to the quantity not available. As a result, for each warehouse, the total quantities available and unavailable are calculated as the sum of respective quantities for all warehouse locations. ## Viewing availability information Visma Net availability data allows you to get complete inventory visibility in all distribution-oriented workspaces, so you can provide better customer service and reduce inventory carrying costs: + For each item, you can view summary information about various quantities of this stock item at various warehouses and locations using the [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/) window. + For each stock component of a kit, using the [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window, you can view the availability data at the bottom of the screen. + For each item, you can view complete information about how its quantities are allocated (in accordance with unreleased documents) at a particular warehouse using the [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. + In the Sales workspace, item availability data is displayed when a user adds a stock item to a sales order in the sales order window: For the selected warehouse, you can view the quantity on hand and quantity available. + In the Purchases workspace, item availability data is displayed when a user adds a stock item to a purchase order in the purchase order window: For the selected warehouse, you can view the quantity on hand, quantity available, and quantities on purchase order receipts and orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About lot and serial numbers /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers page Lot numbers and serial numbers are used to track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About lot and serial numbers Lot numbers and serial numbers are used to track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. ## Enabling tracking of stock items If the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can set up tracking of stock items by lot or serial number, as well as by expiration date. [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) gives additional information about this tracking. ## Number schemes for lot and serial numbers Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and gives you the option to track different products differently. It also provides different valuation methods to account for the cost of inventory per lot or serial number. Kits may have their own serial numbers while also containing components that have lot and serial numbers. ## Serial numbers A serial number is a unique number that identifies a single item of stock, such as a camera, DVD player, or bicycle. Serial numbers can be generated by the system, or you can assign them manually on a per-item basis so the system reflects the numbers provided by the manufacturer. ## Lot numbers A lot number is a unique identification code assigned to a specific quantity or **lot** of a product. A lot number includes the information about the stock item model and may include an expiration date. The same lot number is assigned to every item of the lot. The lot size is generally specified on the purchase order or on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Lot and serial classes Lot and serial numbers are defined at the item class level using the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. Lot or serial classes are divided into three groups by their tracking method: + Classes of items that are not tracked by either number; you should define at least one lot/serial class for such items. + Classes whose items are tracked by lot numbers. + Classes whose items are tracked by serial numbers. ## Guidelines to consider Consider these guidelines when you are deciding which lot/serial classes to create: + Define a class intended for items that will not be tracked. This class can be used as the default lot/serial class if most stock items will not be tracked by any property. + Create separate groups of classes for items with serial numbers and items with lot numbers. Within each group, create separate classes for items with expiration dates and without them, if both types of products are involved in your business. + Use separate classes to group items to which serial numbers are assigned on receipt and on usage. Items purchased for further sale generally are assigned numbers on their receipt, while items produced (and kits assembled) are assigned numbers on their sale or usage. + Consider using additional classes for items with different issue methods: FIFO, sequential, date, and custom. Visma Net provides flexible tools to allow you to configure different templates for generating such numbers, or you can manually enter them. ## Other relevant settings Other settings of the lot/serial classes define: + how and when the numbers will be generated, + whether expiration dates are assigned and tracked, and + what order is used for issuing the items from warehouses. ## Lot/serial class settings When creating a class whose items will be tracked by lot or serial numbers, you specify the following information in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window: + Which tracking method is used for the class. + Whether to track expiration dates or not. + The maximum number of lot or serial numbers that can be assigned at once, controlled by the **Auto-generate number batch size** option. + How the numbers are assigned. + What the issue method is for items of the class. ## Exceeded number of lot or serial numbers If, on a document, a larger quantity of the item is specified, only the maximum number of lot/serial numbers will be generated with the excess quantity remaining with unassigned numbers. You can initiate assignment of lot/serial numbers for an unassigned quantity of the item manually. ## Assignment of lot/serial numbers The following table lists the assignment methods available.
When received When used
  • Items get a lot/serial number when they are received.
  • Items are handled as lot- or serial-numbered throughout their “life” in stock until they’re issued from a warehouse.
  • The lot/serial number is not assigned to items until they are issued them from stock or used in assembly.
  • Before lot/serial numbers are issued, items are handled as stock that is not lot- or serial-numbered.
## Issue method for items in a lot/serial class The following table lists the issue methods for items in a lot/serial class:
FIFO Lot/serial numbers are picked for issue by receipt date (oldest first).
LIFO Lot/serial numbers are picked for issue by receipt date (newest first).
Sequential Lot/serial numbers are picked in alphabetical order.
Expiration Lot/serial numbers are picked by expiration date (faster-expiring first). We recommend that you select Expiration as the issue method for items with a rather short shelf life.
Custom (User-enterable) This method is not implemented in the current version.
## Segmented structure of lot and serial numbers Lot and serial numbers are segmented, and you can decide how many and what kind of segments there should be. Visma Net supports the following types of segments:
Constant A segment of this type is a predefined alphanumerical string to be used in all lot or serial numbers generated for items of the class.
Date A segment of this type will be generated based on the relevant date (of receipt or of usage), which may include day, month number, month name, and two- or four-digit year value.
Auto-incremental value A segment of this type is automatically computed by the system when a new lot/serial number is generated, as it’s actually a numbering sequence assigned.
## Shared or separate sequential numbers for item classes You can use the **Share auto-incremental value between all class items** check box in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window to choose if the same numbering sequence should be used for all items of the same class, or if there should be separate incremental values for different items. |IF THE CHECK BOX|THEN| |---|---| |Is selected|The same numbering sequence should be used for all items of the same class.| |Is NOT selected|you can specify a separate auto-incremental value for each stock item of the class, that is, an individual initial string of digits to be auto-incremented. In this case the items will all have the same segment auto-numbered.| ## Avoiding non-intersecting number ranges To prevent generation of similar serial numbers for different items of the same class, consider using different initial strings (auto-incremented values) for items of the class so that numbers for different items will be generated in non-intersecting ranges. **For example:** Imagine that there are 10 items in a lot/serial class. During a year, no more than 1000 units of any item pass through warehouses. The auto-incremental values for items can be selected in the following way: 000000, 100000, 200000,..., 900000. If additional items (beyond 10) will be added to the class, new auto-incremental values can be used for them. ## Assignment to stock items Each stock item is assigned to a lot/serial class that defines whether the items will be tracked by lot or serial numbers. The following table describes typical procedures for a stock item:
WHEN THEN
stock items are assigned to lot/serial classes using the General settings tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.

lot and serial numbers, if any should be assigned, are generated automatically by the system.

Depending on the assignment method of the lot/serial class, this is done when the stock items are:

  • received

  • issued, or

  • assembled.

such items are moved (transferred between warehouses or sold) the user can invoke the Allocations dialog box, to view or specify particular lot or serial numbers to be transferred or picked for a specific sales order, depending on the issue method selected for the class.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About lot and serial number tracking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking page To be able to track stock items by either lot or serial numbers as well as by expiration dates, you need to enable the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About lot and serial number tracking To be able to track stock items by either lot or serial numbers as well as by expiration dates, you need to enable the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). ## Reasons for tracking items Some products, such as food products and chemical compounds, are tracked because they have expiration dates, while other products, such as medications, are tracked because laws require manufacturers to keep accurate records about their distribution. Still other products, such as electronics, appliances, and cars, must be tracked individually from the manufacturer to the consumer because of safety and warranty issues. Items to be tracked should be assigned to specific lot/serial classes you have created in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. For more details on configuring lot and serial numbers, see: [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/). ## Lot number tracking Lot numbers can be tracked only for base units. If component parts as well as assembled kits have lot or serial numbers, your company will know precisely which assembled kits contain any component, if this information is requested by the component manufacturer. ## Assigning lot numbers on receipts When you enter a purchase receipt for lot-numbered items: + You can specify the quantities of items in units of measure other than base units. If so, the system converts the quantity on receipt to base units and calculates how many lots are received. + The system then generates lot numbers according to the lot number templates specified by the lot/serial classes the items are assigned to. + The same lot number is assigned to all base units in the lot. ### Print lables For the receipt, you can run the [Stock item labels (IN619200)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/) report to print labels for products. This can be useful for stocktaking counts and for picking items for sales orders. ### Example of unit conversion (lot numbers) Consider this example of unit conversion: Suppose that you create a purchase receipt for two crates of lot-numbered goods for which the following information applies: + The base unit is **PIECE**. + A crate contains 12 pieces. + The lot size is a crate. For this transaction, the system will generate two lot numbers and create two receipt transactions. ## Tracking lot numbers on sales orders If your company produces items, you can assign lot numbers to items on their sale. When you enter a lot-numbered stock item on a sales order: + the system generates the list of particular lot numbers (in the base unit) for items to be picked. + Items are picked in accordance with the issue method assigned to the item's lot/serial class or + Items are selected with assigned lot numbers based on the issue method (FIFO, LIFO, Expiration, Sequential or Custom). ### Fractional quantities If the sales unit is smaller than the base unit for an item tracked by lot number (that is, the base unit consists of several sales units), the item may be sold in fractional quantities with the specified lot number. ## Serial number tracking With serialised inventory (stock items with serial numbers), you maintain the history of any serial number and track its costs and to find the customer in case of recall. For serialised inventory, the base unit should be the smallest unit of measure used for the item. In most cases, the same unit is used as the purchase unit, sales unit, and the base unit. ## Assigning serial numbers on receipts When you enter a purchase receipt that includes a serial-numbered item and the quantity was specified in purchase units that differ from the base units: + the system will perform quantity conversion to the base units and + generate a serial number for each base unit of the product. To view the generated serial numbers, you can invoke the **Allocations** dialog box on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. ### Example of unit conversion (serial numbers) As an example of unit conversion, imagine that you enter a purchase receipt for a case of serialised items for which: + the base unit is **PIECE**, + the purchase unit is **BOX**, which includes 10 **PIECES**. For the item, on receipt, the system will generate 10 serial numbers. > [!NOTE] > To enable tracking from supplier to customer, you can use the manufacturer's serial number in one of the segments of serial numbers. ## Tracking serial numbers on sales orders If serial numbers should be assigned on item sale, the numbers are assigned in accordance with the valuation method specified for the item lot/serial class. When you enter a sales order for a serialised stock item in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: + The particular items will be selected in accordance with the issue method selected for the lot/serial class of the stock item. + You can open the **Allocations** dialog box (on the **Document details** tab of this window), if the sales unit is different from the base unit, to view particular serial numbers. > [!NOTE] > When you enter a supplier return, the unit of measure that appears by default is the purchase unit as defined on the item record. Specify particular serial numbers of each returned base unit of the item. ## Tracking expiration dates Visma Net provides an option to track the expiration date for each lot and serial number. The expiration date: + is specified on receipt of the items, and the same date is assigned to all items of a lot. + can be assigned to each item with a serial number individually. Issuing items by expiration date For a lot/serial class whose items are tracked by expiration dates, you can select the **Expiration** issue method to automatically issue items with the earliest expiration dates, which lets you minimize losses. Automatic deduction of expired items For the stock items with tracked expiration dates, the quantity of expired items is calculated automatically and can be deducted from the available quantity. The quantities of expired inventory can be monitored with the help of reports and inquiries, so you can promptly discard the expired items. ## Inquiries and reports for tracking inventory The inquiry windows and reports in the Inventory workspace, listed below, provide various information about the lot/serial numbers so that you can view how the item is allocated, and you can easily locate any item by its lot/serial number: + [Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000/): Use this window to find the required item's location by lot or serial number assigned. + [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/): Use this window to view how the item is allocated: the quantities at specific locations, on sales orders and purchase orders, and in transit between warehouses. + [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/): Use this report to view the list of items (with their specific lot or serial numbers) located at the selected warehouse or particular location.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage warehouses /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage warehouses Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About warehouses and warehouse locations /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations page Given the broad scope of possibilities for warehouses and locations within Visma Net, you can choose an approach that best fits your business. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About warehouses and warehouse locations Given the broad scope of possibilities for warehouses and locations within Visma Net, you can choose an approach that best fits your business. You can use a single warehouse or configure multiple warehouses. Within each warehouse, you can define a single location or configure multiple locations. ## Enabling multiple warehouses You should enable the following functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window according to your needs. + To use multiple warehouses, you must enable the **Multiple warehouses** functionality. + To be able to use multiple locations with multiple warehouses, you must enable both the **Multiple warehouses** and **Multiple warehouse locations** functionalities. ## Using multiple warehouses With the **Multiple warehouses** functionality enabled, you can create a distributed structure of warehouses. In Visma Net, a warehouse does not necessarily represent a physical building where your inventory is stocked. You can: + divide a large physical storage space into multiple areas and define each area as a warehouse in Visma Net. + define a virtual warehouse: For example, you might consider all goods that are on the way from the supplier to you as being located in a goods-in-transit (GIT) warehouse. ## Warehouse identifiers Identifiers for warehouses are defined by the **INSITE** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. You can configure identifiers to have one segment or multiple segments. If you are going to use the multiple segments, you need to determine: + how many segments (and of what length) will be used, + whether the segments should be validated (and if so, what kind of values are allowed), and + whether an auto-numbering segment will be used. ## Creating a new warehouse To create a new warehouse, you use the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. For the warehouse, you specify the following information: + warehouse ID + description + branch the warehouse is related to (if applicable) + address and contact information, and + the general ledger accounts associated with the warehouse > [!NOTE] > The general ledger accounts and subaccounts specified in this window serve as one of the possible sources of accounts and subaccounts to be used by default to post various transactions related to warehouse. The actual accounts and subaccounts for a particular transaction at the warehouse are determined by the posting classes of the stock items involved in the transactions. ## Having multiple warehouses In Visma Net, if you have multiple warehouses defined, you can perform transfers between warehouses, relocating stock items as needed, or you can use one warehouse as a source of replenishment for other warehouses by having purchased goods delivered to only this warehouse and then transferring the goods to other warehouses. ## Using multiple warehouse locations With the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality enabled in Visma Net, you can configure multiple locations in each warehouse to best fit the logistics processes established in your company. By using multiple locations, you can: + reserve specific locations for sales, receipts, or returns. + use some locations for assembly; for other locations, transfers may not be allowed. + assign different primary items to different locations, with validation configured for those items, and + assign different pick priorities to items, to more quickly empty certain locations while using others less frequently. ## Defining location identifiers Although you cannot create a hierarchy of locations directly (site, aisle, pallet, bin, and so forth), you can configure location identifiers that consist of several segments, with each segment denoting a specific level in this hierarchy. Identifiers for locations are defined by the **INLOCATION** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. ## The Location entry setting By using the **Location entry** setting in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window, you can specify whether locations can be added only by using that same window, or also on the fly, as the users enter inventory documents. |If the **Allow on-the-fly entry** option is|THEN| |---|---| |selected|new locations entered on the fly during data entry will also appear in the warehouse's location table (described in the following section) with default settings, which you can modify later if needed.| |not selected|new locations can only be entered by using the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window.| ## Using the location table The **Location table** tab in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window shows all the locations for the particular warehouse. You can add locations to a warehouse and specify how they will be used, and you can view or edit the warehouse's locations. ### Location If you use barcode scanners in your warehouses, you can print location labels for warehouse locations by using the [Location labels (IN619000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/) report. This will help users easily specify locations for purchased items on receipts. ### Location configuration For each warehouse location specified in the location table, you specify its location ID and description. The following table describes additional information you can set for a location:
If you want to Then
include the quantities of stock items stored at this location in the quantity of available items calculated for the warehouse select the Include in qty. available check box.
use this location as a temporary storage or for stock items that were returned or damaged clear the Include in qty. available check box.
choose which inventory operations are allowed for the location

select the relevant alternative(s):

Sales allowed
,
Receipts allowed
,
Transfers allowed
, and/or
  • Assembly allowed
choose the pick priority for the location for picking the items to fulfil the sales order select an integer for the location. The lower the value, the higher the priority of this location.
### Product-specific or class-specific locations You can also choose whether there should be a **primary item** (or a **primary item class** ) for the location. In a warehouse, certain locations may be dedicated to a specific product or a specific class of products. You can configure such a restriction in Visma Net by choosing: + a **primary item** or + a **primary item class** and + setting **Primary item validation** to a restrictive option (warning or error). Primary item validation is enforced only for receipts. If the location already had some quantities of non-primary items before you enabled the validation, these quantities can be adjusted, issued, or transferred from the location without restriction. > [!NOTE] > Avoid setting up primary item validation for all locations in the warehouse. Default locations When you define the warehouse structure, you can set up **default** locations for the following inventory operations: + The receiving location for the purchased goods. + The shipping location from which the goods are sold. + The return material authorisation (RMA) location where returned goods will be received. By specifying a special location for receiving the returned stock items, you can avoid including the location in the quantity availability calculation. + The drop-ship location used to account for drop shipments. Although the goods will be delivered to the customer's location, by defining this location, you can keep data regarding item quantities on drop shipments. On purchase receipts and sales orders, these default warehouse locations simplify data entry. ## Using warehouse specifics for stock items If the details of stocking a particular stock item vary at different warehouses, you specify these details in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, and they are shown on the **Warehouse details** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. For each stock item at a particular warehouse, you can specify: + The default locations for issuing and receiving the item at this warehouse. + The inventory account and subaccount to be used for the stock item at this warehouse. + The sales and purchase units assigned to the item at this warehouse, and the necessary conversion rules. + The ABC code and movement class assigned to the item when it is at this warehouse. + The replenishment settings for the item when it is stocked in this warehouse. + The cost statistics related to this item at this warehouse.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage costs /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage costs Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About default prices /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices page In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About default prices In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. Default prices may be used for the items whose prices do not vary depending on the quantity purchased, season, special promotional periods, and other factors. ## Assignment of default prices and updating You can manually enter the default price of non-stock items, and if the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the default prices of stock items. These are added in the **Default price** field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window and the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window respectively. The default prices for stock items and non-stock items are specified in the base currency and for the base units. You can update the default prices as often as needed. ### Bulk editing prices If you need to enter the default prices for many or all the items or update the prices in bulk, you can create appropriate import scenarios. ### Inventory module not enabled If the Inventory module is not enabled in your system, you can only specify default prices for non-stock items. ## Limitations of default prices The following are the most important limitations related to default prices: + A default price has no start and expiration date and once specified, it is used for the item until a new default price has been entered. + The system does not keep the history of default prices. You cannot define the default prices as promotional prices that are in effect for a particular date range or as tiered prices. + When updating price lists, you can specify a method of calculating the updated prices (based on item markup per cents, percent of increase, or so forth), and the new prices will be calculated automatically. However, when updating the default prices you calculate the default prices externally (using any method you consider appropriate) and enter the resulting prices manually on per item basis or import them from a file by using an import scenario. + The default price of an item is used as a sales price on an invoice (and a sales order, if applicable) only if there are no other prices (base price, or customer-class price, or customer-specific price) entered for the item. ## Discounts If the default price is used for an item on an invoice or sales order, the discounts defined in the system will apply to the default price too.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About item costs and valuation methods /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods page Visma Net allows you to track stock item costs over time in accordance with the valuation method assigned to each item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item costs and valuation methods Visma Net allows you to track stock item costs over time in accordance with the valuation method assigned to each item. Item costs are tracked for base units, as well as units in which items are stored at warehouses or moved between locations or warehouses. ## Determining unit costs Depending on the valuation method you have selected for the stock item, the cost of its base unit is either: + computed by the system based on purchase receipts or + estimated outside the system and entered manually by the user. For information about how costs are maintained for non-stock items, see [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). The system uses the item's valuation method to revalue its stock and to determine its unit cost for sales orders and inventory transactions. ## Valuation methods The following valuation methods are available to choose from: + FIFO (first in, first out) + Specific + Average + Standard cost These methods are discussed in detail in the sections below. ### Assigning valuation method You assign valuation methods to stock items in the following ways: + By using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, you can assign a valuation method to a class, which will be used for the items of the class. + By using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, you can assign a valuation method to a particular item, if you want to override the valuation method of its item class. ### Reassigning the valuation method As long as the item is out of stock, you can reassign an item's valuation method in the following way: + from **FIFO** to **Average**, + from **Average** to **FIFO**, and + from **Standard cost** to **Average** and **FIFO**. ## FIFO valuation method If the **FIFO** valuation method is assigned to a stock item, its unit costs are recorded in layers, each of which is identified by + the receipt date, + the quantity, and + the purchase price (unit cost). ### Cost layers Each new receipt creates a new cost layer with specific unit cost. You can view the cost of the last layer in the **Last cost** read-only field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. > [!NOTE] > By default, the item cost is zero until it has been automatically or manually assigned. When a certain quantity of the stock item is issued, the cost for the item is assigned starting with the earliest available cost layer. If the quantity to be issued is greater than the quantity in the earliest layer, the entire quantity from the earliest layer will be issued (with the associated unit cost) and the rest of the required quantity will be issued using the next earliest layer (with another unit cost). ### Example with the FIFO issue method Let's say a stock item was purchased in the following way: + Cost layer 1: May 10, 5 units at €8 each + Cost layer 2: June 10, 5 units at €10 each The total stock cost is (5 \* €8) + (5 \* €10) = €90. Further imagine that for a sales order, 8 items are required. All units from cost layer 1, and three units from cost layer 2 will be used to complete the transaction, with the extended cost equal to (5 \* €8) + (2 \* €10) = €60. For the next sales order, there will be no more items with the €8 unit cost. ### Cost separately option For each location in a warehouse that has the **Cost separately** check box selected, separate cost layers will be created, based on purchase receipts made to the particular location. If certain quantities of the items should be issued from the location, the extended cost will be computed based on those location-specific cost layers. ## The specific valuation method The Specific valuation method is used for items with lot or seral number tracking. With this method, the unit cost for each item is defined by the unit's purchase price. The unit cost assigned to the item on its receipt will remain the same until the item is issued, used as a component, or sold. ### Cost layers With the **Specific** method, cost layers are based on the serial or lot numbers. New receipts specifying the same serial or lot number will update the cost of the layer. ### Example with the specific issue method Imagine that a stock item was purchased as follows: + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023423 at €2.00 each + May 21, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023523 at €2.10 each + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023623 at €1.90 each + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023723 at €2.20 each The total stock cost is €820. When items with the serial numbers 11023666 and 11023444 are sold, the unit costs recorded to the COGS account are €1.90 and €2.00 respectively. ## The average valuation method If the **Average** valuation method (also known as **average moving cost** ) is assigned to the stock item, the unit cost will be calculated as the average weighted cost of all items at the warehouses or the total costs of all quantities of the stock items at the warehouses divided by the total quantity. This valuation method is used for items that do not require tracking by lot or serial numbers or by expiration dates. ### Cost layers The average cost will be automatically updated every time a new receipt specifying a unit cost different from the current average cost is released. Once this receipt has been released, a batch of journal entries will be generated to adjust the costs of all available items. You can view the current average cost in the **Average cost** read-only field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ### Example with the average valuation method Imagine that a stock item was purchased as follows: + Layer 1: 100 items at €2.00 each + Layer 2: 100 items at €2.10 each + Layer 3: 100 items at €1.90 each + Layer 4: 100 items at €2.20 each The total stock cost is €820, and the average cost is €2.05. If you sell 250 items, the unit cost is €2.05, and the extended cost recorded to the COGS account is €512.5 = €2.05 \* 250. ## The standard cost valuation method Standard costs, which are estimated to include some of the indirect and direct costs allocated, for stock items are determined outside of Visma Net by cost experts. For a stock item with the **Standard cost** valuation method assigned, the unit cost is entered directly by the user in the **Pending cost** field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ### Warehouse specific standard costs For items with the standard cost valuation method, standard costs can be maintained for each warehouse separately if the **Override standard** check box, located on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, is selected for the item stocked at a particular warehouse. The item cost doesn't change as new receipts are released. ### Example with the standard cost valuation method A stock item with a standard cost defined at €2.50 was purchased in the following way: + Layer 1: 100 items at €2.00 each + Layer 2: 100 items at €1.90 each + Layer 3: 100 items at €2.30 each + Layer 4: 100 items at €2.60 each The total stock cost is €1000. Any differences between the standard cost and the unit cost on receipts multiplied by the quantity on the receipt are recorded to the standard cost variance account: in this case, €50, €60, €30, and –€10 respectively. On sales orders, the unit cost will appear as €2.50. ### Updating standard costs Generally, standard costs are revised at the end of the financial year based on the financial results of the year, although they can be updated as often as is needed. If you want to update standard costs for a number of stock items, use the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. New values for standard costs are entered as pending standard costs. The pending cost assigned to a stock item that uses the standard cost valuation method becomes effective starting on the **Pending date** specified on this tab. ### Update costs for multiple items If you want to make similar changes to many or all stock items, use the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window to enter new values and compare current and pending costs side by side for all stock items. If you are satisfied with the changes, you can update the current standard costs with the pending standard costs for all items or only selected ones by using the **Process all** or **Process** action on the window toolbar. ### Historical data The system doesn't keep a history of the standard costs for the stock items, displaying only the last cost and current cost values on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. The historical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. ## Unit cost and manual cost on issues For items with the **Standard cost** or **Average** valuation methods, on inventory issues, unit costs (costs with respect to the base unit) are specified in the **Unit cost** field in the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. If an item has the **FIFO** or **Specific** valuation method assigned, costs of its units may be different, and the **Unit cost** field on the window displays the unit cost for the first unit to be issued, in accordance with the stock item's issue method. You can invoke the **Allocations** dialog box to view particular items to be issued or to select them by lot or serial numbers. The **Manual amount** value in the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window will automatically appear as the sum of the unit costs of all listed items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About the cost of inventory /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory page For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the cost of inventory For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. Inventory accuracy depends in part on how well you account for inventory. There are two basic methods of accounting for inventory: Perpetual : By using a perpetual method, your company can estimate the total cost of its inventory at any moment, updating inventory quantities and inventory account balances by every transaction, purchase, or sale. Information is updated continually in real time with this approach, without the need to cease inventory operations for counting. Over time, the accuracy of inventory levels and total costs may deteriorate due to theft, spoilage, losses, and other factors. Periodic : By using a periodic method, your company estimates inventory levels by performing periodical (cycle) counting. Cycle counting provides the most accurate data but is expensive and disruptive to business. With Visma Net, your company can use the advantages of both methods to the extent that fits your business. While having perpetual inventory, you can implement the cycle counting strategy that will help you minimise the costs of performing stocktaking while improving the accuracy of inventory levels. ## Multiple valuation methods For a perpetual inventory method, you use inventory valuation methods to estimate the cost of inventory stored at each warehouse at any moment. Valuation (cost flow) methods define how unit costs are calculated for each stock item on receipts and issues, thus allowing the system to maintain a correct, up-to-date inventory balance. With the Inventory workspace, you can choose from the following valuation methods: + Standard cost + Average + First-in-first-out (FIFO) + Specific ## Negative quantities In the Inventory workspace, a negative quantity of stock item of a specific item class is allowed at a location as long as the quantity on hand is positive. Appropriate warnings are issued on transactions that result in negative quantities. The **Allow negative quantity** check box is located in the **General information** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) windows. Negative quantities on hand can result when an issue has been made before the receipt specifying arrival of the certain quantity of the stock item is released. In this case, for over-issued quantity, a new layer is created. The cost assigned to the layer is the most recent historical cost of the item. When the inventory is actually received (on receipt in question release), the system compares the cost on the over-issue layer with the cost on the receipt, and generates a cost adjustment for the difference multiplied by the quantity on the layer (the quantity of over-issued units). > [!CAUTION] > This option can be used for items with the standard cost, average cost, and FIFO valuation methods. You may not use this option for items with lot or serial numbers assigned. ## Inventory valuation and revaluation You can review the cost of inventory on hand in the [Inventory valuation (IN61550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/) and [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/) reports. Generally, standard costs are revised at the end of the financial year based on the year’s financial results, although they can be updated more often. ### Editing and updating standard costs The pending standard costs and their effective dates are entered manually for each stock item that uses this valuation method on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. Pending standard costs are updated for multiple items by using the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. For items whose standard costs are being updated, revaluation of their cost is performed. The system generates a batch of transactions that increase or decrease the balance of the inventory accounts, depending on whether the pending costs are greater or less than the current costs and updates the standard cost revaluation accounts defined by the item’s posting class.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About inventory ranking methods /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods page In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inventory ranking methods In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. These categorisation methods let you rank stock items by their cost and turnover, respectively. This information can be used to group items for planning stocktaking and for making strategic and tactical decisions. ## ABC codes Data gathered on various types of businesses shows that the 80-20 rule applies to most of them: 80% of the effect is generated by 20% of the cause. Similar logic generally applies to inventory: + A small number of items (which can be designated with the **A** code) typically accounts for the largest value of stock. + A slightly larger number of items ( **B** code items) accounts for a smaller yet significant stock value. + The remaining large number of items ( **C** code items) accounts for only a small part of stock value. > [!NOTE] > In Visma Net, the ABC-codes are specified in such way that the total of percentages for all codes should be equal to 100%. ### Stock value as count basis Ranking items by stock values can be used as the basis for planning efficient physical inventories in which **A** items are counted more often than **B** items (which in turn are counted more often than **C** items). This reduces the total number of stocktakings performed while maintaining more accurate inventory levels. ## Defining ABC codes You define the ABC codes to be used for stock items by using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. For each code, you specify the percentage threshold and the frequency of stocktaking per year. ## Assignment of ABC codes Initially, you can manually assign ABC-codes to some items by using the **General information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and the items will have the same code assigned in every warehouse until the code assignment is updated for the first time. You should only assign codes to items for which codes will be fixed (that is, not updated over time) and skip initial assignment for other items. At the end of a financial period, you can use the [Update ABC code (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) window to mass-assign ABC-codes to items based on their stock-on-hand values. ## Automated assignment process For the selected warehouse and financial period, the system assigns pending ABC-codes as follows: + The system arranges stock items in decreasing order, based on their percentages of total stock. + For each item, a subtotal is calculated as the item's percentage plus the previous subtotal (the sum of percentages of previous items). + These subtotals are compared to the thresholds specified for codes as follows: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |items have subtotals that are less than the threshold for the A code,|they are assigned the pending A code (including the item whose subtotal is equal to the A threshold if any).| |items have subtotal percentages between the threshold for A and the sum of the thresholds for A and B codes,|they will be assigned to the pending B code.| Assignment continues in this fashion, and the subtotals for the C-code items should be greater than the sum of **A**, **B** thresholds and less than the sum of the **A**, **B**, and **C** thresholds. You can view the list of the stock items with their current and pending ABC codes, and update the ABC-code assignments for all displayed items. ## Costly inventory insights The ABC analysis gives you an immediate view of items that are expensive to stock. Via this analysis, you can learn where your money is locked up and reduce the stock of expensive items. When planning stocktaking counts, you can perform stocktakings for items with each code at the appropriate frequency for that code. Items with fixed codes are part of the assignment, but their codes do not change in accordance with the statistical data. > [!NOTE] > ABC code assignment should be performed only when a certain volume of statistical data is available. If the data is available for fewer items than a certain threshold number, no items will be assigned to the **A** code. ## Movement classes As with ABC codes, movement classes group items based on key inventory data or in this case, turnover. For each movement class, defined using the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window, you specify the frequency of stocktakings per year and the threshold value of criteria based on turnover to assign stock items to this class. The number of turnover periods per year for all warehouses is specified ( **Turnover periods per year** ) on the **General information** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## Assignment of movement classes You can initially assign items to movement classes using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window; these items will have the same class in every warehouse until movement class assignments are updated for the first time. You might instead initially assign only items to the classes, for which class assignment will be fixed, and skip assignment for other items. ## Updating movement class You can update movement class assignments for a particular warehouse and a chosen turnover period using the[Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) window. The system assigns movement classes to items as follows: + The system arranges stock items in decreasing order, based on their turnover rate. + For each item, a subtotal is calculated as the item's turnover rate plus the previous subtotal (the sum of turnover rates of previous items). + These partial sums are compared to the specified threshold for a class. + All the items for which the accumulated values are less than the threshold for the first movement class, are assigned to this movement class. + The items with accumulated percentages between the threshold for the first and second movement class will be assigned to the second class. Assignment continues in this fashion. ## Basis for stocktaking frequency When planning stocktaking, you can organise it by the frequencies specified for movement classes. Thus, you can perform stocktakings for items with higher turnover rates more frequently. Items of each movement class will be counted at the frequency you have specified for the movement class.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage stocktaking counts /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stocktaking counts Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About overview of stocktaking options /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options page Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overview of stocktaking options Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. A full stocktaking greatly improves the accuracy of availability data, but it disrupts business processes and can be very costly. An alternative to a full stocktaking is cycle counting, whereby all items are assigned to specific cycles and separate stocktaking counts are performed for each cycle's items at an appropriate frequency. Because they can be conducted more quickly, cycle counts are less disruptive to daily operations; they also can be tailored to specific business types. But over time, the accuracy of item availability data deteriorates due to material movement between locations and warehouses. ## Planning stocktaking of various types By using Visma Net, you can create as many stocktaking types or types of stocktaking counts as you need using the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. A stocktaking type may describe a stocktaking that is performed periodically, such as a full stocktaking or a stocktaking performed at a specific warehouse for particular stock items. The definition of each stocktaking type includes the following: + What method is used to generate the list of stock items for counting + Whether the stocktaking should be always performed at a particular warehouse or can be performed at any warehouse The particular list of items is generated when you prepare the stocktaking sheets for the stocktaking of the selected type using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window. ## Flexible stocktaking combination Using Visma Net, your company can create a stocktaking system by using a combination of full stocktaking and cycle counting that best fits its policies and goals. You can perform stocktaking counts based on different generation methods. In this article you will find a description of the following alternatives for doing this. + Counting the full stocktaking + Counting by item class + Counting by cycle and by cycle stocktaking frequency + Counting by movement class and by associated stocktaking frequency + Counting by ABC code and by code stocktaking frequency + Counting specific stock items ## Counting the full stocktaking If you select the **Full stocktaking** generation method in the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window, the resulting stocktaking document includes all stock items available in the specified warehouse, in all locations or only selected ones and lot or serial numbers. Counting all the items in the warehouse is a time-consuming procedure generally performed during a planned closing. All movements of inventory involved in counting should be stopped during counting, and no transactions are released during counting. ## Counting by item class Depending on how you have defined item classes, you may decide to perform counts by item class. For example: One item class may include your company's most valuable items, which you stock more frequently. If you select the **By item class** method in the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window, you can choose the class on the **Item class selection** tab, which appears once you select this method. You can create a type for each item class. ## Counting by cycle and by cycle stocktaking frequency You can create stocktaking cycles using the[Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. Stocktaking cycles are used to group different stock items for counting by your chosen criteria. For each cycle, you specify the frequency of counts (by the counts-per-year value) performed for items of the cycle. Once all items are assigned to cycles, you can organise stocktaking counting by cycles. ### Variations The **By cycle** generation method has two variations, depending on whether you specify a cycle or select the **By frequency** check box on the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a cycle in the Cycle ID field and clear the By frequency check box,|only the items assigned to a particular cycle will be included in the stocktaking.| |you select the By frequency check box and do not specify a cycle,|the items of all cycles for which counting is due based on the frequency associated with their cycles will be included.| ### Steps to include all items To ensure that no items will be skipped during the stocktaking counts, follow these steps: + Perform an initial full stocktaking. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + As often as specified for each cycle in your system (by the counts-per-year value). + At a frequency defined by the largest number of counts per year among all cycles. ### By the largest number of counts - an inclusive count frequency When you create the stocktaking type, select the **By frequency** option, and when you are preparing the stocktaking document, only items that are due for counting by their cycle frequencies will be included. In this case, a stocktaking document can include items of more than one cycle, if the counts-per-year values for different cycles are factors of the largest count-per-year value. ## Counting by movement class and by associated stocktaking frequency Multiple studies show that the more often a product is received or shipped, the less accurate its availability data becomes. Thus, it may be reasonable to conduct more counts for items with higher turnover rates. In Visma Net, you define movement classes using the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window and assign items to classes either on a permanent basis or by using their turnover rates during the specified turnover period. This is done in the Stock items window under the General information tab. ### Variations The **By movement class** generation method has two variations, depending on whether you specify a movement class or select the **By frequency** check box on the **Movement class selection** tab (which appears when you choose this generation method). The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a movement class in the Movement class ID box and clear the By frequency check box,|only the items assigned to a particular movement class will be included.| |you select the By frequency check box rather than specifying a movement class,|all the items of all classes, for which counting is due based on the frequency associated with the movement class, will be included.| Once items are assigned to movement classes, you can organise counting by movement classes in the following way: + Perform an initial full stocktaking count. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + By creating a type for each movement class and performing counts of each type at the frequency defined for the movement class. + By creating a type with the **By frequency** check box selected for the **By movement class** generation method. ### By frequency based on the maximum counts per year Make sure that the counts-per-year values are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. A stocktaking document in this case can include items of several movement classes, for which counts-per-year values are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. Conduct counts at a frequency defined by the largest value of counts per year required for movement classes. ### Example Lets say you have defined three movement classes and that they have been set with the following counts per year value: Movement class 1 - 4 counts per year Movement class 2 - 2 counts per year Movement class 3 - 1 count per year During stocktaking, all movement class items are initially included. In the subsequent session, only items from movement classes 1 and 2 are included, since items in class 3 been accounted for to meet the required count (one count). This logical progression applies to all subsequent stocktakings. ## Counting by ABC code and by code stocktaking frequency If your company uses ABC codes to identify items critical to your business, select the **By ABC code** generation method to have counts performed based on the frequencies required for items with different codes assigned. ABC codes, created using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window, group items by their stock value in a specific warehouse in a specific period, based on period-to-date balances of appropriate inventory accounts. ABC codes divide items into groups that require different management and controls; for example, **A** code items, because of their high impact on the business, should be counted more often than items with other codes assigned. ### Variations The generation method for counting based on ABC codes has two variations, based on your specifications on the **ABC code selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a code in the ABC code field and leave the By frequency check box clear,|only the items assigned to a particular ABC code will be included in the stocktaking.| |you select the By frequency check box and don't specify an ABC code,|items with any code for which counting is due, based on the frequency associated with the ABC code, will be included in the stocktaking.| Once ABC codes are assigned to items, you can organise counting by ABC codes in the following way: + Perform an initial full stocktaking. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + Create a type for each ABC code defined in the system (which has a specific frequency specified in the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window). Conduct counts for items assigned to every code with the appropriate frequencies. ### By frequency based on the maximum counts per year Make sure that the counts-per-year values for different codes are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. Then, when you are preparing the stocktaking document, only items that are due for counting by their code frequency will be included. A stocktaking document in this case can include items with different codes assigned, for which counts-per-year values are factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. ### Example Lets say you have defined the following counts per year values for the ABC codes: A - 4 counts per year B - 2 counts per year C - 1 count per year During stocktaking, all code items are initially included. In the subsequent session, only A and B code items are included since code C items been accounted for to meet the required count (one count). This logical progression applies to all subsequent stocktakings. ### Optimal stock counting for most companies Counting by ABC codes usually works best for maintaining accurate stocktaking counts because in most businesses, a small number of items generally accounts for the largest value of stock, and this method lets you count the high-value items most frequently. ## Counting specific stock items By using the **By item** generation method, you can create stocktaking types that generate stocktaking lists for: + items with a negative book quantity, + randomly selected items, + items selected by the date of previous counts, or + particular items that you specify. Select the appropriate **Selection method** on the **Stock item selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table explains the specific types of counts: |Type of count|Items with negative book qty|Random items (up to)|Last count on or before|List of items| |---|---|---|---|---| |**Context**|Visma Net can allow a negative inventory balance for items of specific item classes. The stocktaking may show positive values.|By using this option, you can also check the accuracy of the full stocktaking. The system generates the list of items for random counting.|You can create a stocktaking type, for a particular warehouse or any warehouse, that would generate the joint list of items that were counted a specified number of days ago or earlier.|In some cases, you may want to perform stocktaking for only particular items.| |**Items included**|Items that have negative quantity at one or more locations.|Items selected at random up to the specified number of items.|Items counted the specified number of days ago are included in this list, regardless of what type of stocktaking the item was involved in earlier.|The specific items you list in the Items table.| |**Useful for**|Checking the actual availability of items shown on the books with negative quantities.|Evaluating the accuracy of item availability data. You can also check the accuracy of the full stocktaking.|Setting up a schedule based stocktaking, or performing stocktaking that doesn't include items that have recently been counted.|For example, you may want to stocktake the most valuable items stored at a specific location every other day.| |**Procedure**|Create a stocktaking type and specify that items should be selected for counting only if they have negative quantity at one or more locations.|Select the Random items (up to) selection method and then specify the number of items for counting.|Choose the Last stocktaking on or before selection method, and in the field that appears to the right of the option, specify the number of days.|To stocktake only particular items that you specify, select the List of items selection method and add items to the list.|

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking page The stocktaking process in a particular warehouse includes the following stages: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About stocktaking The stocktaking process in a particular warehouse includes the following stages: 1. Prepare stocktaking 1. Taking stock 1. Data entry 1. Adjustment generation These stages are discussed in detail in the following sections. ## Prepare stocktaking The preparation process is described in the table below.
Stage Description
1

The user:

Note: It is only possible to select a particular warehouse and locations if a warehouse is not defined by the type.

Stocktaking types are created in the Stocktaking types (IN208900) window.

  • Clicks the Generate stocktaking action in the window toolbar. Result: The list of items to be counted is shown in the Detailsarea, and the stocktaking review document will be generated.

  • Uses the Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) to print item lists for distribution to all employees involved in taking stock.

### The Stocktaking review document The document ID is auto-generated in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to stocktakings in the[Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Starting at the moment when the document has been generated, no operations involving items included in the list are allowed, meaning that this inventory is in a "frozen" state. The Stocktaking review document contains the list of items for stocktaking, arranged to your specifications on the **Assignment order** tab of the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. ### Document lines The line number is assigned to one or more items that + have the same item ID, + are located in the same storage location, and + if applicable, have a specific lot or serial number. For each stock item included in the stocktaking, the document may have one or more lines, depending on how many locations are used to store the item and whether the item has subitems or lot or serial numbers. For items with serial numbers assigned, a separate line is generated for each serial number. ### Count sheets for counting items Use the [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/) to print item lists for distribution to all employees involved in taking stock. You can use these stocktaking sheets for recording the results of actual stocktaking and, when signed, for entering the stocktaking results. ### Using tags in stocktaking Tags may or may not be used in the stocktaking process, depending on the **Use tags** check box on the Inventory preferences window. A stocktaking with tags is more complicated than a stocktaking without them; during a tag stocktaking, every item in a warehouse is counted by its location. The tag stocktaking is appropriate for a full-scale, end-of-year stocktaking. When you use tags for the first time, specify an appropriate **Last tag number** on the Inventory preferences window. This value incremented by 1 will be used as the first tag number. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you use 1000 as the start number for the first stocktaking. If the **Use tags** option is selected, the stocktaking document includes tag numbers for each line generated. To print tags for the stocktaking in progress, use the Stocktaking sheets report and distribute tags among employees in accordance with their lists. ## Taking stock Employees involved in the stocktaking use the stocktaking sheets. No movement of goods is allowed at the time of stocktaking, and no stock transactions are released. If you are using tags, they are used for recording the stocktaking results for the line items they specify. When the stocktaking is complete, tags are used for data entry. Match all tags against the document to ensure that all tags are returned and no data is skipped. ## Data entry The Data entry process is described in the table below.
Stage Description
1

A manager responsible for stocktaking can:

  • oversee the data entry process by using theStocktaking count (IN305010) window. Note: Each line of the document has its own status, and as stocktaking data is entered, the status of the line changes from Not entered to Entered.
2

An employee:

  • enters a number in a cell in this window.
Result
the number is committed to the database and the data can be visible to other users who are using the window and to the manager.
3

The manager:

  • reviews the stocktaking data in the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window.

  • can cancel the stocktaking, or

  • complete the stocktaking when all the lines of the document have the Entered status.

  • can set the stocktaking values to zero or change the line status from Not entered to Skipped, if there is no valid data for some of the lines.

4

The system:

  • verifies the data.
5

The manager:

  • can indicate to the system that the stocktaking is completed by clicking Finish stocktaking in the window toolbar.

Result: Completing the stocktaking will unfreeze the stock items involved if the Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state check box is not selected for the specific warehouse in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.

If the option is selected, stock will be frozen until data entry is completed.

## Adjustment generation Once the manager overseeing the stocktaking completes it, the system changes the Stocktaking review document's status to **Completed** and generates an inventory adjustment or receipt to correct the book quantities. The reference numbers of these documents are displayed on the **Adjustment info** tab, and the status of the documents is **Balanced**. A receipt is generated for items with no records of item-associated transactions. These items are considered newly received, and a receipt is generated. An adjustment is generated for all other items with a non-zero quantity variance. The system uses the current costs of the items for calculation of the cost variance.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About setting up cycle stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-setting-up-cycle-stocktaking page Any resale business must periodically perform a full stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up cycle stocktaking Any resale business must periodically perform a full stocktaking. To minimise the planned closings of the business that are required for full stocktaking, you can use a combination of full stocktaking and cycle stocktaking. For cycle stocktaking, all items are assigned to specific cycles and separate stocktakings are performed for each cycle’s items at the appropriate frequency. Because they can be conducted more quickly, cycle stocktakings are less disruptive to daily operations; they can also be tailored to specific business types. For more information, see: [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/). We recommend that you set up stocktaking by cycles during the initial configuration of the Inventory workspace. However, you can configure cycle stocktaking later as well. ## General stages The configuration of cycle stocktaking includes the following stages: 1. Creating stocktaking cycles. 1. Assigning stock items to appropriate cycles. 1. Creating stocktaking types. 1. Performing the stocktaking. These stages are discussed in the following sections. ## Creating stocktaking cycles You create stocktaking cycles by using the [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. You should decide how often you want to perform full stocktakes and which items you want to stocktake more frequently (and how often). For the full stocktake and for each cycle, you specify how many times in a year the items should be counted, that is the stocktaking-per-year value. We recommend that you select the stocktaking-per-year values (frequencies) for cycles as factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. Thus, items of all cycles will be counted during the full stocktaking, which is performed least frequently, and some of the other stocktakings will include items of more than one cycle. ## Assigning stock items to appropriate cycles If you configure cycle stocktaking during the implementation stage, you can assign stock items to stocktaking cycles when you import the stock items from your legacy system. Otherwise, you assign each item to an appropriate cycle manually. ## Creating stocktaking types You will need a type for a full stocktaking (see [Create a stocktaking type for full count](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count/) ) and one type for stocktaking by frequency. Optionally, you can create a stocktaking type for each cycle. You should plan the convention for the identifiers of stocktaking types and decide how to organise data on stocktaking sheets for each type of stocktaking. ## Performing the stocktaking Perform the stocktaking in the following order: 1. Conducting an initial full stocktaking by using the **Full** stocktaking type. 1. Conducting other stocktakings with the frequency determined by the largest (among all cycles) number of stocktakings per year and by using the stocktaking type that selects items by their stocktaking frequency. For each stocktaking, only items that are due for stocktaking by their cycle frequency will be included. Some stocktakings will include only the items with the largest frequency, while other stocktakings will be joint stocktakings for items from two or more cycles. > [!NOTE] > If some warehouses have items of only specific cycles, you can perform stocktakings by cycles in those warehouses. About setting up stocktaking by ABC codes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-setting-up-stocktaking-by-abc-codes page If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up stocktaking by ABC codes If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. Counting by ABC codes usually works best for maintaining accurate stocktaking because in most businesses, a small number of items accounts for the largest value of stock, and this method lets you stocktaking the high-value items most frequently. For more information on using ABC codes in Visma Net, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/). If you plan to use counting by ABC codes, we recommend that you set up stocktaking by ABC codes during the initial configuration of the Inventory workspace. However, you can configure ABC counting later as well. ## General stages The configuration of stocktaking by ABC codes includes the following stages: 1. Specify frequencies for the ABC codes defined in your system. 1. Assign stock items to appropriate ABC codes. 1. Create stocktaking types. 1. Organising counting by ABC codes. These stages are discussed in the following sections. ## Specify frequencies for the ABC codes defined in your system When planning stocktaking frequencies, make sure that the stocktaking-per-year values for different codes are factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. ## Assign stock items to appropriate ABC codes If you configure counting by ABC codes during the implementation stage, you can assign initial ABC codes to items when you import the stock items from your legacy system. Otherwise, you assign the codes to items manually. Later, as the statistical data on sales is collected, you can update ABC codes for items automatically. ## Create stocktaking types You will need a type for a full stocktaking (see: [Create a stocktaking type for full count](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count/) ) and a type for counting by frequency. Then, when you are preparing the stocktaking document, the system will include only items that are due for counting by their code frequency. Also, you can create stocktaking count types for particular codes. You should plan the convention for the identifiers of stocktaking count types and decide how to organize data on stocktaking sheets for each type of stocktaking. ## Organising counting by ABC codes Organising counting by ABC codes in the following way: 1. Performing an initial full stocktaking. 1. Conducting stocktakings based on ABC codes that have the **By frequency** option selected. 1. Optionally, conducting stocktakings by particular ABC codes. Set up cycle stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/set-up-cycle-stocktaking section Instead of conducting a full stocktaking, organisations may use cycle counting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up cycle stocktaking Instead of conducting a full stocktaking, organisations may use cycle counting. In this approach, all items are assigned to specific cycles, and separate stocktaking counts are carried out for the items within each cycle at a suitable frequency. Cycle counts offer a quicker alternative that is less disruptive to daily operations. Additionally, they can be customised to suit various business types. The following sections describe how to set up cycle stocktaking. ## Create a stocktaking cycle For the cycles that you planned, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Cycle ID** column, type the unique identifier for the new cycle. 1. In the **Description** column, type a brief description. 1. In the **Stocktaking per year** column, enter the integer indicating how many times in a year the items of the cycle should be counted. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Assign a stock item to a stocktaking cycle 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. For each stock item to be assigned to a specific cycle, do the following: 1. Select the stock item by its item ID. 1. On the **General information** tab, in the **Stocktaking cycle** field, select the appropriate stocktaking cycle. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for a stocktaking cycle For each cycle, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By cycle**. The **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, select an appropriate stocktaking cycle. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for stocktaking by frequency For stocktaking to be performed for multiple cycles at once, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By cycle**. The **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, make sure the **By frequency** check box is selected. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Set up stocktaking by ABC codes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/set-up-stocktaking-by-abc-codes section Using ABC codes for counting is typically the most effective approach for ensuring accurate stocktaking counts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up stocktaking by ABC codes Using ABC codes for counting is typically the most effective approach for ensuring accurate stocktaking counts. This is because, in many businesses, a limited number of items usually contribute significantly to the overall stock value. This method allows for more frequent stocktaking of high-value items. The following sections describe the stages of setting up stocktaking by ABC codes. ## Specify a stocktaking frequency for an ABC code 1. Go to the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. 1. For each ABC code available in the system, in the **Counts per year** column, type the appropriate integer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Assign an ABC code to a stock item 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. For each stock item, do the following: 1. Select the stock item by its item ID. 1. In the **ABC code** field on the **General information** tab, select the appropriate code. 1. Select the **Fixed ABC code** check box if the item should be permanently assigned to the same code. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for an ABC code For each ABC code, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By ABC code**. The **ABC code selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **ABC code selection** tab, select an appropriate ABC code in the **ABC code** field. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the boxes: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create the stocktaking type for stocktaking by frequency For stocktaking to be performed for multiple cycles at once, create a PI type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By ABC code**. The **ABC code selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **ABC code selection** tab, make sure the **By frequency** check box is selected. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the boxes: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a stocktaking type /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a stocktaking type 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, enter a new stocktaking type. 1. Enter a **Description**. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select the method you will use to create stocktaking sheets for this stocktaking type. 1. On the **Warehouse/location selection** tab you find the **Warehouse** field. Select the warehouse where stocktaking of this type will take place. If you leave the field empty, this type will apply at all warehouses. > [!NOTE] > The **Warehouse/location selection** tab will only be displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab you can select the order in which tag and line numbers are assigned to stocktaking counts of this type. > [!NOTE] > In the **Blank lines to add** field, you can define the number of blank lines that will be added at the end of the stocktaking sheets. You can use them if you find and count unregistered items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a stocktaking type for full count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count section With Visma Net, you can organise stocktaking counts by cycles, ABC codes, movement classes, item classes, or stock items; you can even perform counts for randomly selected items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a stocktaking type for full count With Visma Net, you can organise stocktaking counts by cycles, ABC codes, movement classes, item classes, or stock items; you can even perform counts for randomly selected items. Nevertheless, you should occasionally undertake full stock counts to maintain correct book quantities. 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type a unique identifier for a new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description indicating that this is the full count. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **Full stocktaking**. 1. Optional: On the **Warehouse/location selection** tab, specify the warehouse where the full count should be performed. Do this only if full counts will be performed only in this warehouse. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the count sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the count sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Perform a stocktaking count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/perform-a-stocktaking-count section You can enter the count data into the system by using the Stocktaking count window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Perform a stocktaking count You can enter the count data into the system by using the Stocktaking count window. Other employees who are participating in the count simultaneously, can enter their count data using the same window from their computers. Once you have entered any count data in this window, the service commits the data to the database. This makes the data immediately visible to all users who may simultaneously be using this window for data entry. ## How to enter count data 1. Go to the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the count you are participating in. 1. Select the warehouse where you participated in the count. 1. For each item on your count sheet, find the table row with the item. 1. When you have finished, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## How to enter count data for a new item 1. Go to the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. 1. Click **Add** in the table toolbar. The **Add line** dialog box opens. 1. Select the item ID for the new item. 1. Specify the location of the new item. 1. In the **Qty.** field, enter the item quantity measured in the unit of measure shown. 1. If the item requires a lot or serial number, enter this number in the **Lot/Serial no** field. 1. If the item has a lot number, specify the expiration date. 1. To add only this record, click **Add and close**, which closes the dialog box. To add more than one record without closing the dialog box click **Add**. 1. When you are finished, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Import count data from Excel /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/import-count-data-from-excel section In the Stocktaking review window, you can import count data from Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx files). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import count data from Excel In the Stocktaking review window, you can import count data from Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx files). ## Preparation Review the Excel spreadsheets with the count results and correct any errors in the counted quantities. ## The import count data process 1. Go to the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the count you are participating in. It has the status **Counting in progress**. 1. On the **Stocktaking details** tab, click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png). 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Select file**. Browse to the file with your count results and select it. 1. Click **Upload**. The **Common settings** dialog box is displayed. 1. In the **Culture** drop-down list, select the language of the file. 1. In the **Mode** drop-down list, select **Update existing**. 1. Click **OK**. The **Columns** dialog box is displayed. 1. Map each column from the file to a column in the window, as follows: + In the **Column name** column, select a column in the uploaded file. + In the **Property name** column, select a column to update from the columns available. 1. Click **OK**. 1. Review the values in the **Physical quantity** and **Variance quantity** columns. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The data import can take some time. A spinning wheel icon in the toolbar shows that the import is in progress. When this changes to a green check mark icon, the import is completed successfully.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

View and correct imported count data /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/view-and-correct-imported-count-data section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and correct imported count data If you see a ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) in the toolbar instead of the expected ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png), the import process has failed. Do the following to review and correct the errors: 1. In the top right corner of the window, click **Help** and select **Trace**. 1. You can see that the errors are highlighted in the log. 1. Go to the original Excel spreadsheet and correct the errors. 1. Save the original spreadsheet. 1. Repeat the steps in the [Import count data from Excel](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/import-count-data-from-excel/) process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Complete a stocktaking count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/complete-a-stocktaking-count section Once the count has been completed by all involved employees and all the available data have been entered, you can complete the stocktaking and generate all the required adjustments by using the Stocktaking review window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Complete a stocktaking count Once the count has been completed by all involved employees and all the available data have been entered, you can complete the stocktaking and generate all the required adjustments by using the Stocktaking review window. You can also cancel the stocktaking count. 1. Go to the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the stocktaking count to be completed. 1. Select the warehouse where the count has taken place. 1. On the **Stocktaking details** tab, review the list of items that were counted and their variance quantities. Notice the past expiration dates of the items. 1. Make sure that all counted items have the status **Entered** and have their quantities specified in the **Physical quantity** column. 1. Click **Finish counting**. The system calculates the totals, including the variance total quantity and amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You cannot complete the stocktaking count if the table contains lines for which the status is set to **Not entered**. You must first set the physical quantity of these lines to zero by clicking **Set not entered to zero**, or exclude them from the stocktaking count by clicking **Set not entered to skipped**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Manage replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage replenishment Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About automated replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment page Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automated replenishment Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. Replenishment for stock items is performed on a per-warehouse basis. ## Single vs multiple warehouses The following table describes the difference between having single and multiple warehouses. |If|Then| |---|---| |your company has a single warehouse,|it purchases inventory to replenish the stock.| |your company has multiple warehouses (and the Multiple warehouses functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled),|your company can purchase stock for some warehouses and replenish stock for others by transferring required quantities from these warehouses.| Some products at specific warehouses may be purchased only if there are customer orders requesting the products. In this case the items can be purchased to a wholesale warehouse and transferred to point-of sale warehouses. By using forecast models, you can fine-tune such parameters as safety stock, reorder point, and maximum quantities based on sales statistics. ## Replenishment preparation In the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window, you can view the list of items that require replenishment. To more effectively process the requests, you can select a warehouse and a planned purchase date, and view the list of applicable items requiring replenishment in this warehouse at a specified date. You can further narrow the list by a specific supplier, or you can view only the items assigned to you as a product manager or to your work group. You can select particular items and process them by clicking **Process**, or you can process all the listed items by clicking **Process all** in the window toolbar of the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. ## Conditions to initiate replenishment for a stock item To create the list of items that require replenishment, the system uses the settings specified on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, for each item at each warehouse where the item can be stocked. ### Criteria for inclusion on item list An item is listed in the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window if the following general conditions are fulfilled: + The processing date you have selected is within the time interval when the replenishment settings are effective (defined by **Launch date** and **Termination date** ). + The quantity on hand is below the reorder point for this item at this warehouse. + The item has one of the following sources: **Purchase**, **Manufacturing** or **Transfer**. For more information, see About configuration of automated replenishment. ### Generation of replenishment request The following table describes the conditions that decide when replenishment requests are generated. |IF|AND|THEN| |---|---|---| |an item should be replenished by using the **Fixed** replenishment method,|the replenishment source is **Transfer**,|the system will generate a replenishment request for the transfer economic recommended quantity (transfer ERQ).| |an item should be replenished by using the **Fixed** replenishment method,|the replenishment source is **Purchase**,|the system will generate a replenishment request for economic order quantity (EOQ) specified for the selected supplier, on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window.| |an item should be replenished by using the **Min./max.** replenishment method,||the system will generate a replenishment request for the target quantity which is calculated as follows: Target quantity = Max. quantity - Reorder point - Quantity on supply + Quantity on demand| ### Low season adjustments The replenishment quantities on the list appear adjusted for low seasons defined by your system's set of seasonality settings. By using seasonality settings, you can adjust the quantities for replenishment that are initiated during low seasons, each of which is defined by its starting and ending date. For a purchase date within a low season, the replenishment quantity is calculated with a **decreasing** factor, which is a factor that appropriately decreases replenishment quantities. ## Handling replenishment requests Processing the items listed in the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window, prompts the system to create appropriate replenishment requests, which are internal Visma Net documents used as the basis for creating purchase and transfer orders. Replenishment requests have reference numbers, which are determined by the numbering sequence specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The system handles replenishment requests differently based on the item replenishment source. The two tables below describe the **Purchase** and **Transfer** replacement source respectively. ### Purchase replacement source
Stage Description
1 The replenishment requests appear in the Create purchase orders (PO505000) window.
2

The user:

  • can use the window to create one order for all items to be purchased from a specific supplier.
3

The system:

  • performs any needed conversions to purchase units.
The replenishment quantities on the purchase order will be calculated differently depending on the replenishment method that has been selected for the item in question. The following table explains this. ### For the Purchase replacement source
If Then
the Min./max.method has been chosen for the item,

the system computes the replenishment quantity as:

the difference between the maximum quantity and the reorder point, minus the quantity on supply (the quantity of items on unreleased purchase orders, purchase receipts, and quantities in transit), and plus the quantity on demand (on customer released and unreleased orders).

the Fixed order quantity method has been selected, the system uses the EOQ values specified for the chosen supplier.
### Transfer replacement source The **Transfer** option is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses functionality** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Stage Description
1 The replenishment requests appear in the Create transfer orders (SO509000).
2

The user:

  • creates transfer orders to move the products from the replenishment warehouse to the warehouse when the item needs replenishment.
## Calculating the final replenishment quantities The quantities specified on the purchase order may differ from those specified on the replenishment requests. The final replenishment quantity for an item on a purchase order is calculated based on the settings provided for the supplier that will fulfill replenishment. The table below explains the changes that may occur. |If|Then| |---|---| |the quantity required by replenishment settings is less than the minimum order quantity,|the system uses the minimum order quantity.| |the quantity required by replenishment settings exceeds the maximum order quantity,|the system uses the maximum order quantity.| |the requested quantity is not divisible by the lot size,|the result is rounded up to the next integer, and that number of lots is ordered.| |the order frequency is specified,|the system estimates the time interval between the previous purchase order and the planned purchase date of the current replenishment.|

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About configuration of automated replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment page To be competitive, a company must strike a balance with its inventory levels: The company should not overstock inventory, because this ties up working capital, yet it should avoid stockouts, which result in lost customers and diminished customer loyalty. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About configuration of automated replenishment To be competitive, a company must strike a balance with its inventory levels: The company should not overstock inventory, because this ties up working capital, yet it should avoid stockouts, which result in lost customers and diminished customer loyalty. With Visma Net, you can configure automatic replenishment for stock items at multiple warehouses. If your company has many warehouses, some may be used only for receiving purchases, while others may be used only for sales. You can configure the system so that warehouses from which sales are performed are replenished from warehouses where purchases are performed. ## Before you start Before you start to configure automated replenishment in your system, thoroughly consider the warehouse functions in your system, including which warehouses will serve as replenishment sources for other warehouses and which will be replenished by direct purchasing or manufacturing. ## Configuration steps To reduce time that would be spent typing replenishment settings for each item in each warehouse, you can configure default replenishment settings at multiple levels. In general, you perform the following steps to configure automated replenishment: 1. Create appropriate replenishment classes. 1. Assign each warehouse to a replenishment class. 1. For each item class, specify replenishment settings for all replenishment classes, including the applicable seasonality settings. 1. For each stock item, review the replenishment settings that are default values from the item class, and make any needed adjustments. 1. For each stock item at each specific warehouse, review the replenishment settings that are default values from the item. Adjust these settings for each warehouse if needed. The sections below provide information that will help you execute these steps. ## Replenishment classes Replenishment classes group warehouses by the **replenishment sources** used in your company, that is, how stock is replenished at the warehouse. You create replenishment classes by using the [Replenishment classes (IN208800)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800/) window and you assign a replenishment class to every warehouse. For each class, specify its + name, + description, and + replenishment source. ### Replenishment source As the replenishment source, you can select one of the following options:
Source Description
None No replenishment is required. This could be used, for example, for a warehouse that is closing its operations.
Purchase The items for stock replenishment will be purchased from suppliers.
Manufacturing The items for stock replenishment will be manufactured.
Transfer The items will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Purchase to order The items for stock replenishment will be purchased only when customer orders have been received for them and in the quantities requested by the orders.
### Virtual warehouse For items that are usually sold by using drop ship orders and do not require replenishment, you can create a virtual warehouse and assign the replenishment class with the **Drop shipment** option as the replenishment source. ## Setting up default values To make it easier to provide replenishment settings for each item that is specific to each warehouse where the item is stocked, you can set up default values at multiple levels. The sections below explain how to do this. Fist level: Item-class replenishment settings Specify replenishment settings to be used as default settings for items of the class, by using the the Replenishment settings tab on the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ### Items at separate warehouses If you know that items of the class are stocked at multiple warehouses with different replenishment sources, configure how the items are typically replenished for each replenishment class. Specify the following information for each item class: + The method of demand calculation + The seasonality + The replenishment method + The demand forecast model and parameters for the model (the period type, number of periods to analyse, and service level). + The launch and termination dates of the period when the settings are effective for the class. ### The method of demand calculation When specifying the method of demand calculation for each item class, you can select one of the options described below.
IF THEN
you select the Hard demand only option,

the demand will be calculated as

Allocated sales order qty. + Sales order qty. on shipments + Qty. on sales back orders.

you select the Item class settings, the demand will be calculated in accordance with the availability settings specified for this item. This setting is defined on the General information tab of the Item classes (IN201000) window.
### Second level: Item replenishment settings On the **Replenishment settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, you can view the replenishment settings of a particular item, which by default are provided by the item class. For the item, you can review replenishment settings for different replenishment classes that might be used if the item is stocked at multiple warehouses, and override the settings if needed. ## Replenishment settings for an item at a specific warehouse The many replenishment settings for all items at all warehouses are filled in with default values. In the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window ( **Replenishment info** tab), you can review the replenishment parameters to be used for the particular item at the selected warehouse. These settings come from the item settings but can be overridden for a particular warehouse. > [!NOTE] > You cannot use a different replenishment source for an item than the one specified for the warehouse. If an item is stocked at multiple warehouses, there may be multiple records with different sets of replenishment parameters. The settings for a particular item are stored in the **Replenishment info** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Configuration of consolidated purchasing for replenishment With Visma Net, you can configure replenishment for a number of warehouses that is performed by transfers from one large warehouse, a distribution centre, for which centralised purchasing is performed, and perform it efficiently. For items in the smaller warehouses that should be replenished by transfers from the distribution centre, specify **Transfer** as a replenishment source, while for the same items stocked in the distribution centre select **Purchase** as a replenishment source. The table below describes the replenishment process for multiple warehouses.
Stage Description
1

The user

2

The system

  • generates transfer orders requesting replenishment.
  • creates demand for replenishment in the distribution centre.
2

The system

  • creates a single purchase order for all the requested quantities of each item no matter which the demand warehouses are.
3

The user

  • creates a receipt for the merchandise from a supplier for this purchase order and releases it. If the item is replenished by using the Purchase to order source, for each warehouse where the item is stocked, the user can specify the same replenishment warehouse.
4

The system

  • automatically generates transfer orders to split the received quantity between demand warehouses according to the quantities on original sales orders.

Related pages

Windows

About replenishment methods and their parameters /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-methods-and-their-parameters page With Visma Net, you can assign different replenishment methods to different items of inventory stocked at different warehouses and specify warehouse-specific parameters for these methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About replenishment methods and their parameters With Visma Net, you can assign different replenishment methods to different items of inventory stocked at different warehouses and specify warehouse-specific parameters for these methods. Different items may require different parameters because of different customer demand for them and different numbers of days required to receive the requested quantities from the suppliers. You can use either of the following replenishment methods: **Min./max.** and **Fixed order qty**. For each stock item, the system uses the specified method to calculate the quantities required to replenish the stock of this item, based on the replenishment parameters that you specify on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. The available replenishment methods and their parameters are discussed in the sections below. ## The min./max. method You use the **Min./max.** method to maintain the stock level of a stock item at a particular warehouse between the specified minimum and maximum quantities. To use this method for an item, you should specify the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Maximum quantity This is the maximum stock quantity allowed for the item at the warehouse.
Safety stock This is the additional stock of the item maintained to avoid stockouts. A safety stock is required if there are fluctuations in demand and supply.
Reorder point The system uses the reorder point quantity in the Min./max. replenishment method rather than a minimum quantity. Generally, a minimum quantity would be estimated as the quantity that may be required during the lead time (the time when the product is being shipped from the supplier location to your company). The quantity set as the reorder point is the minimum quantity plus the safety stock.
### Process triggered at low stock level Once the system detects that the current stock level (the available quantity) has reached or fallen below the reorder point, it: + calculates the required replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and current quantities to replenish the stock up to the maximum quantity. + estimates the available quantity by adding quantities on supply and deducting quantities on demand. You control the way the system calculates the quantities on supply and quantities on demand for classes of stock items by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The fixed order quantity method Use the **Fixed order quantity** method when you want to replenish the item stock with a fixed quantity each time it falls below the reorder point. This method uses the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Fixed quantity

We recommend that you use as the fixed quantity the economical order quantity (EOQ) determined by warehouse specialists for a particular item by estimating the cost of ordering the item from a particular supplier. For each supplier from which the stock item can be purchased, the EOQ is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.

You can view EOQs specified for all suppliers of the item on the Supplier details tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.

Safety stock This is an additional stock of the item maintained to avoid stockouts. The safety stock is required if there are fluctuations in demand and supply.
Reorder point For this method, just like above, the reorder point is specified as the safety stock plus the quantity that may be required during the lead time.
### Process triggered at low stock level With the **Fixed order quantity** method, the system: + generates request for the economical order quantity (EOQ) for the item once it determines that the available quantity reaches reorder point or is lower than that. + estimates the available quantities by adding quantities on supply and deducting quantities on demand. You define the way the quantities on supply and quantities on demand are calculated for stock items by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The parameter estimation For automated replenishment, you can manually enter estimates of replenishment parameters, such as safety stock, maximum quantity, and reorder point that were made externally by logistics specialists for each item. Alternatively, you can configure the system to automatically calculate the replenishment parameters. In Visma Net, you can use demand forecast models to calculate replenishment parameters by using sales statistics. With this flexibility, you can lower carrying costs, avoid stockouts, minimise excess or obsolete inventory, improve cash flow, and increase customer loyalty levels. ## Other item-specific parameters The parameters described below are also used in automated replenishment for the stock item at the specific warehouse.
Parameter Description
Launch and termination dates These dates define the range during which the replenishment settings specified in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window will affect the item if it is stocked at this warehouse. By default, the dates come from the item settings (which are specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window but can be overridden for the item at the specific warehouse).
Supplier details

To replenish the stock of the stock item at the warehouse, you should specify the supplier from which inventory will be purchased.

The system uses the default supplier of the stock item (as specified on the Supplier details tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window) unless you have chosen another supplier for the item at the warehouse.

The other item-specific parameters are associated with the selected preferred supplier:

  • Lead time required to ship the item from the supplier location to the warehouse
  • Lot size
  • Order frequency (minimum number of days between two successive orders)
  • Minimum and maximum order quantity
  • EOQ

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast page Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. Replenishing the stock in time and in the proper quantities helps businesses to retain customers while reducing storage costs. For an overview of the automated replenishment functionality implemented in Visma Net, see[About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). To predict the demand, that is, the stock level you may need in the future for each item, you can use demand forecast methods. ## Demand forecast method The current version of Visma Net uses the **moving average** method, one of the simplest methods. In Visma Net, you can use the predicted average daily demand, calculated with the help of demand forecasting models, to periodically update the values of replenishment parameters (such as maximum quantity, reorder point, and safety stock) in order to more precisely calculate the quantities required for replenishment. ## Moving average method With the moving average method, you calculate the demand for a specific future period based on historical data for multiple consecutive periods in the immediate past. This method works well for items with specific trends in sales or with stable sales not subjected to random significant fluctuations. To apply the moving average method to forecasting demand, you choose + the specific time period (a week, a month, or a quarter), and + the number of these periods to analyse the data, depending on how sales of the particular product or group of products (implemented in Visma Net as an item class) change over time. This forecast model uses the data available for the specified number of past periods to forecast demand for the period immediately following the last period whose data is used in forecasting. ### Data from full periods If you select a month as the forecast period and want to perform a forecast on the 15th day of the current month, 15 days' worth of data will not be used for forecasting; only data from full periods is used. The system calculates the daily demand for the nearest future period based on daily sales in all days of the specified number of prior periods. As the actual data for the last forecast period becomes available, you can forecast demand for the next period by using the data of the previous periods shifted by one period. This method smooths out the data; the more periods you use to calculate the average demand, the greater the smoothing effect. ### Average lead time calculation The **average lead time** is calculated for each stock item‒preferred supplier pair based on all purchase orders in the system history. The average lead time is computed as average difference (on all orders) between the date when + an order is created (the **Requested on** date) and + the date of the receipt created for the goods listed on the order. ## Using seasonality parameters for forecasting Sales of some products follow certain cycles or patterns. For example, the peak of ski sales is in the winter. Such patterns in sales can be described as **seasonality**. A set of seasonality settings is a list of low and high seasons with appropriate factors (coefficients) that show how sales decline or increase in each of these specific seasons, as compared to average sales volumes calculated over all time. The seasons for particular products or groups of products with similar sales behaviour and corresponding factors can be determined by analysing sales data spanning several financial years. ### Defining seasonality settings You define seasonality settings by using the[Replenishment seasonality (IN206600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600/) window. The seasons for one seasonality should not intersect. For date ranges not included in any season, the factor is 1.0 by default. A low season for groups of products may span multiple financial periods or be contained in a single financial period. The seasonality settings are used in the following procedure: 1. The system normalises the historical data available for the specified seasons. The sales volumes for each day of a season are deleted by the appropriate factor to calculate the sales as though it were a normal season. 1. The system calculates the average daily sales amount based on the historical data of the specified number of periods. For seasons within the specified periods, the system uses the normalised data. > [!NOTE] > The standard deviation for the average daily demand is calculated for actual sales data, not for normalised data. 1. The average daily sales amount is adjusted for seasons if seasons are expected within the forecast period. The average daily demand is multiplied by the average seasonality factor (calculated over all days in the forecast period—normal days and days of seasons). ## Calculation of replenishment parameters The system uses: + the calculated average daily demand, + average lead time, and + their standard deviation values, to compute the parameters below that are used in automated replenishment: **Reorder point** and **Safety stock**. ### The reorder point calculation > [!NOTE] > Reorder point = (Average daily demand)*(Average lead time) + (Safety stock) ### The safety stock calculation The safety stock is calculated as follows to address possible fluctuations in demand: > [!NOTE] > Safety stock = serviceFactor \* sqrt (aLeadTimeMSE \* aDemandPerDay)^2 + (aLeadTime \* aDemandMSE)^2 > > Where MSE is calculated as statistics method: Mean squared error The **Maximum stock** is set equal to **Reorder point**; if needed, you can manually increase the value of **Maximum stock**. ### Service level setting The service level is used to optimise the safety stock level. Generally, it is set on the item-class level, but you can specify it for each item in each warehouse if needed. The service level represents the probability of not reaching stockout. The **Normsinv (service level)** function provides the factor that adjusts the safety stock required for the specified service level. With the service level selected at 50%, the safety stock is zero (that is, not required). ### Default value for service level The factor reaches 1.0 with the service level approximately 84%, which is the default value for service level in the[Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. To maintain a higher service level, you will need a safety stock that exceeds the calculated quantity. ## Setting up parameter calculation You specify the forecast method and its parameters for each item class by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, and then the settings are used as default values for items of the class. You can select values that differ from the default ones for particular items of the class by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. Moreover, you can adjust the replenishment settings for each warehouse in which the items are stocked. ## Updating replenishment parameters by forecast-based values You use the following Visma Net windows to update replenishment parameters and then prepare the replenishment: + [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/): You use this window to compute the average daily demand and average lead time, and then to calculate the following parameters used in automated replenishment: **Maximum quantity**, **Reorder point**, and **Safety stock**. + [Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500/): In this window, you review the parameter values suggested by the forecast and replace the old values of replenishment parameters. You can manually adjust the suggested parameters if needed. + [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/): Use this window to find the items that need replenishment and to calculate replenishment quantities for these items. + [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/): To generate purchase orders for items requiring replenishment, you can use this window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manage inventory transactions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory transactions Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About inventory transactions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions page Inventory transactions are used to account for stock items moved to or from a specific warehouse, between locations within a warehouse, or between warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inventory transactions Inventory transactions are used to account for stock items moved to or from a specific warehouse, between locations within a warehouse, or between warehouses. Purchases and sales cause stock item movements, and the respective inventory transactions are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originated in other workspaces. Your company may also have direct inventory transactions or those not based on a financial document, such as an issue transaction to remove damaged or expired goods from inventory. Because direct transactions are not standard operations, they should be accompanied by reason codes to explain why they were performed. With the Inventory workspace, you use the following documents to account for inventory transactions performed: Receipt : To record the arrival of some quantity of stock items at the warehouse Issue : To record the withdrawal of some quantity of stock items from the warehouse Adjustment : To update the quantity of stock items at the warehouse performed (usually after stocktaking counts) and to update costs for items with standard cost and average valuation methods Transfer : To record the movement of stock items between locations or warehouses Kit assembly : To update the quantities of kits that were assembled and items used as kit components ## Receipts ### Creating receipts Inventory receipts, created and viewed by using the [Receipts (IN301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000/) window, are used to account for inventory received at a warehouse. If the Purchases workspace is integrated with the Inventory workspace, the system creates inventory receipts automatically once purchase receipts have been released. You can perform a direct receipt at a warehouse or warehouse location when some quantity of a stock item is received as the transferred inventory in a two-step transfer process. ### Items with no transaction history Also, during physical inventory, a receipt is generated for items with no history of transactions. The items are considered as newly received, and an inventory receipt is generated. ### Posting settings for items The information required to post transactions listed in automatically generated receipts comes from the posting class of the item, defined in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. When an inventory receipt based on a purchase receipt is released, the item's posting class determines the general ledger accounts (inventory account and Supplier ledger accrual account) to be updated. If the item has the average cost valuation method assigned, its costs are also updated. ### Reason codes The system inserts the default reason code for receipts, specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, automatically, but you can choose a more relevant reason code. Reason codes are defined in the[Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For direct receipts, the system specifies the costs of items automatically based on the item valuation methods. On release of a receipt, the inventory account (depending on posting settings) will be updated; the offset account will be determined by the reason code selected for the receipt line. ## Issues ### Creating issues The system automatically generates issues, which allow you to account for inventory withdrawals and returns, upon release of sales orders, credit and debit notes, and kit assembly documents. You can create, view, or modify issues using the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. ### Direct issues You can use a direct issue not linked to any sales order or note in the following situations: + To remove expired or damaged goods + To return excessively issued goods If an issue is the result of an employee picking items to fill a sales order, the extended cost amount usually debits a cost of goods sold account and credits an inventory account, with the accounts determined by the posting class of the stock item. With a direct issue, the extended cost amount decreases the inventory account balance and increases the balance of the offset account. The chosen offset account depends on the reason of the transaction; in any case, it's a specific expense account. ### Reason codes Reason codes used for issues should provide offset accounts for specific types of issues. The system automatically inserts the default reason code for direct issues specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, but you can choose a more relevant reason code. If the issue is made for kit assembling, the offset account is usually an expense account such as **Material expense**. If the issue is made to remove expired goods, the offset account might be **Expired goods' costs**. ### Return transaction If a stock item was issued in excessive quantity and is being returned, or if an inventory withdrawal was incorrect or not needed, you can create a return transaction and specify a reason code for it. A return to inventory increases the balance of the inventory account and decreases the balance of the offset account specified by the reason code. ## Adjustments ### Creating adjustments Adjustments can be created manually or by the system. You can enter, view, or modify adjustments in the [Adjustments (IN303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000/) window. ### Use of adjustments You can use an adjustment in the following situations: + To write off shrinkage occurring due to theft, loss, or expiration of goods. + To correct a released issue or receipt. + To adjust costs for items with FIFO and specific valuation methods. (The reference to the original receipt, and the date of receipt are required.) + To document unrecorded gain or loss detected during stocktaking count. For example, previously written-off (as loss) items may reappear during counting. + To create initial inventory balances for a new implementation. ### Inventory transaction corrections You can create an adjustment to correct a released transaction (receipt or issue) with an error. Because the system records each inventory transaction for accounting purposes, you cannot delete an incorrect transaction. An adjustment specifies a negative or positive quantity of the items and updates the inventory accounts. In the process of standard cost updating, the system generates cost adjustments to update the respective inventory accounts and standard cost variation accounts. In the process of stocktaking, when the data entry is completed, the system generates adjustments for items for which quantity on hand differs from count data. ## Transfers ### Creating transfers Occasionally, you might need to move inventory from one location or warehouse to another location or warehouse. In Visma Net, a transfer is created, viewed, and modified in the [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) window. You can use transfers to record two types of inventory movements. One-step transfer : Movement between different locations within a warehouse or between warehouses performed in one step Two-step transfer : Movement between different warehouses performed in two steps ### One-step transfers A one-step transfer documents the movement of items from one location to another one within the same warehouse. Also, goods movement between two warehouses can be performed as a one-step transfer, if goods are moved immediately or very quickly (as with adjacent warehouses). A batch generated for one-step transfer includes no transactions if inventory accounts and subaccounts used for the items are the same for the source and destination locations. If the accounts and subaccounts differ, the system will generate journal entries for transactions performed between the inventory account used for the item at the source location, the in-transit account (specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window), and the inventory account used for the item at the destination location. If a transfer includes more than one line, the journal entry to the in-transit account is the summary for all line items. The system selects unit costs for items automatically based on the items' valuation methods. ### Two-step transfers Two-step transfers are used for transferring inventory between any two warehouses located far enough from one another that they cannot be moved immediately. In a two-step transfer, the stock items are issued from the source warehouse's location and costs of items are recorded to the in-transit account specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window for all two-step transfers. Later, when the transferred inventory arrives at the target warehouse, the user creates an inventory receipt with a reference to the original inventory transfer document; the batch generated for the receipt will move the costs of goods from the in-transit account to the inventory account used for the items in the destination warehouse. Depending on the item class, the quantities of in-transit goods may or may not be included in availability calculation. The rules for inventory availability calculation are specified for each item class on the **General information** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## Kit assemblies ### Creating Kit assemblies Kit assemblies, which you create using the [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window, are used to account for kits and their components. As a result of assembly transactions, new kits (finished goods) are created and their quantity on hand increases, while quantities of the kit components are deducted by the quantities used in kits. A batch generated on kit assembly release updates the following accounts: + the inventory account associated with the kit at a particular warehouse, + the inventory accounts associated with stock components, and + the expense accrual accounts associated with non-stock components. ## Transaction reason codes As noted, you use reason codes to indicate why inventory transactions are made. Each reason code has a default account and subaccount specified, and they are used as the offset account and subaccount for the inventory transaction. You can specify reason codes for inventory receipts, issues, and adjustments.

Related pages

Windows

View inventory transactions details /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transactions-details section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to check details when something is not correct. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transactions details The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to check details when something is not correct. Use this screen to look at specific item's movements in a specific period. You can use selection criteria to display the data you want to see. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction details (IN404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000/) window. 1. In **Period**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the period for which you want to view the details. You can also specify date ranges or choose **By financial period (without running values)**. 1. In **Location**, you see where the item is located. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select another location. 1. In **Item ID**, select the item you want to see transaction details for. This is a required field. 1. The table shows details such as transaction type, status (released or not), quantity in and out, cost in and out and may also let you drill down to underlying documents in the columns **Ref. no.**, **Sales order no.** and **Purchase order receipt no.**. 1. For items that have underlying documents or other information, you can also click **Stock item**, **Summary** or **Allocation details** to drill down to details in related windows. > [!NOTE] > Click **Summary by day** to see only summarised information for an item on a specific day. > [!NOTE] > Click **Include unreleased (without costs )** to hide the columns **Cost in**, **Cost out** and **Unit cost**, and also display unreleased transactions.

Related pages

Windows

View inventory transactions by account /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transactions-by-account section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses this window to re-conciliate the inventory. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transactions by account The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses this window to re-conciliate the inventory. Use this window to view detailed information about transactions in a selected inventory account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. 1. Go to the [Inventory transactions by account (IN403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000/) window. 1. In the **Inventory account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account for which you want to see the transactions. Select a **Period** and / or date range if you want to narrow your search. You can also choose to list the results by financial period. 1. If you want to see information for a specific stock item or from a specific warehouse, select the item or warehouse in **Item ID** or **Warehouse**. If you prefer to see a daily summary of transactions by account, select **Summary by day**. 1. The table lists the transactions that match your criteria. You can sort and search on any of the column headings. In the transaction type column, you can see the type of transaction, for example **Receipt** or **Adjustment**. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can drill down in the columns **Ref. no.** and **Item ID**. > [!NOTE] > You can go directly to related windows, by clicking **Summary** or **Allocation details** in the navigation bar. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction history to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

View inventory transaction history /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transaction-history section You use this window to look at item movements from one date to another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transaction history You use this window to look at item movements from one date to another. It is typically used by a warehouse manager, who wants to track inventory transactions. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction history (IN405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the item for which you want to see the transaction history. Select a start and end date in the date fields if you want to narrow your search. 1. If you want to see information from a specific warehouse, select the warehouse in **Location**. If you prefer to see a daily summary or transactions, select **Summary by day**. You can also click to include unreleased transactions. 1. The table lists the transactions that match your criteria. You can sort and search by clicking the column headings. In the **Trans. type** column, you can see the type of transaction, for example **Receipt** or **Invoice**. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can drill down in the fields **Ref. no.**, **Sales order no.** and **Purchase order receipt no.**. > [!NOTE] > You can go directly to related windows, by clicking **Stock item**, **Summary** or **Allocation details**. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction history to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

Use the inventory transaction summary /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/use-the-inventory-transaction-summary section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to get a sum of all transactions grouped by period and item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use the inventory transaction summary The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to get a sum of all transactions grouped by period and item. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction summary (IN406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) window. 1. In the **Period** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the period for which you want to see the transaction summary. Select **By financial period** if you want to see transactions according to a specific financial period. 1. In the **Location** field, select the warehouse for which you want to see the transaction summary. Your company may for example have a standard location and a return location. You can also select a specific item ID if you want the summary to show transactions for only that item. 1. Select **Show items without movement** if you want to display items that have had no movements in the period you are viewing. You can sort and search on any of the column headings in the table. For example, it is easy to see which item has sold more, by clicking the **Sales** column label and selecting **Sort ascending** or **Sort descending**. 1. To see more details about the warehouse and location of an item, select **Warehouse details** and **Location details**, to display the corresponding columns. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can click the **View** button and select Inventory transaction details, **Summary** or **Allocation details** to drill down to details in related windows. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction summary to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

Inventory windows /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Inventory workspace. ## Transactions [Receipts (IN301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000/) [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) [Adjustments (IN303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000/) [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) ## Registers [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) ## Processes [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) [Release inventory documents (IN501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/release-inventory-documents-in501000/) [Close financial periods (IN509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/close-financial-periods-in509000/) [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) [Update ABC code (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) [Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) [Validate inventory (IN505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/validate-inventory-in505000/) [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/) [Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500/) [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) ## Inquiries [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/) [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) [Inventory transaction summary (IN406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) [Inventory transaction history (IN405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) [Inventory transaction details (IN404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000/) [Inventory transactions by account (IN403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000/) [Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000/) [Stock items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) [Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/summary-of-items-sold-and-purchased-in40199s/) ## Reports [Inventory balance (IN61500S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s/) Displays detailed, up-to-date information about the quantities and unit costs of stock items at different warehouses and locations. [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/) For the chosen period, presents detailed information about the beginning and ending quantities of stock items at different warehouses and locations. [Inventory valuation (IN61550S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/) Displays information about the quantities on hand and the total cost of inventory by inventory account, with details for different warehouses. [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/) For the chosen period, displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses change during the period. [Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s/) This report displays summary data for each inventory account/subaccount resulting from operations with stock items. [Inventory register (IN61400S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s/) Presents up-to-date, detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). [Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s/) Displays up-to-date summary information about every generated inventory document (receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer). [Preview standard cost change (IN617500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500/) Gives you estimates of the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you perform updating of the standard costs of the items. [Goods in transit (IN616500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500/) Shows up-to-date information about the goods in transit, their total quantities, and their total cost. [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/) Displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected aging date. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window,. [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/) Generates stocktaking sheets for the selected stocktacking. [Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500/) Lists the stock items included into stocktacking, and displays the book quantities and the count results for the items. ## Preferences [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) [Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/) [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) [Availability calculation rules (IN201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/availability-calculation-rules-in201500/) [Replenishment classes (IN208800)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800/) [Replenishment seasonality (IN206600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600/) [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) [Shipping zones (CS207510)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-zones-cs207510/) [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) [FOB points (CS208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/fob-points-cs208500/) ## Other [Stock item labels (IN619200) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/) Generates labels for stock items received according to a particular receipt. [Location labels (IN619000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/) Generates labels for locations within specific warehouse with stock item or item class specified. ABC codes (IN208500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500 page This window holds the definitions of the ABC codes used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # ABC codes (IN208500) This window holds the definitions of the ABC codes used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In Visma Net, ABC analysis is based on relative stock values of stock items. For each code to be used in your system, you can specify the threshold value of the criteria to be used to assign items to it, and the frequency of stock takes required for stock items assigned to it. To assign codes for the first time or to update code assignment for items at a particular warehouse, based on the stock values for the selected financial period, use the [Update ABC codes (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) window. For details on using ABC codes, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) and [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The top part
Element Description
Total ABC code % The total percentage of the criteria used to assign stock items to all ABC codes, 100%.
## The table This area displays a table showing all ABC codes defined in the system and their properties.
Column Description
ABC code The code defined in the system.
Description A brief description of the code.
Counts per year The number of stocktaking counts to be performed per year for the items with this code assigned.
ABC code %

A threshold value (%) of the criteria to be used to assign the stock items to this code.

For details on assignment method, see About inventory ranking methods.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Adjustments (IN303000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000 page In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Adjustments (IN303000) In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. You can save adjustment documents with the status **On hold** or **Balanced** and release them. The processing of adjustment documents depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/). By default, adjustments are saved with the status**On hold** if the **Hold documents on entry** option is selected. Adjustment totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** option is selected. When an adjustment is released, its transactions are posted to general ledger if the **Automatically post on release** option is selected. For more information about adjustments, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates document release, which changes the status of the adjustment to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports:

## The top part In this area, you can select an existing adjustment by its reference number or specify summary information about a new adjustment.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the adjustment, which the system automatically generates according to the numbering sequence assigned to adjustments in the Inventory preferences (IN101000).
Status

The status of the adjustment. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited. An adjustment with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document’s data has been validated by the system and the document can be released. A document with this status can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the receipt remains balanced.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. A document with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold

A check box that, if selected, indicates that the receipt has the On hold status.

Clear the check box to save adjustment with the Balanced status.

Date The date when the adjustment was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the adjustment should be posted.
External ref. Any external reference number of the inventory adjustment document.
Description A brief description of the document or the transactions entered.
Total qty. The total quantity of stock items specified in the adjustment.
Control qty.

The manually entered quantity of items specified in the adjustment.

Note

This field is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) is selected.

Enter this value manually to confirm the total adjusted quantity of stock item as compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document.

If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.

Total cost The total cost of stock items listed in the adjustment.
Control cost

The manually entered cost of stock items listed in the adjustment.

Note

This field is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) is selected.

Enter this value manually to confirm the total cost as calculated automatically for the document.

If the Control cost and Total cost values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.

## The Transaction details tab This tab contains the list of transactions included in the adjustment document. The system automatically validates the data upon entry, flagging incorrect data with error indications. Correct the data before you try to save or release the document.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add items to the adjustment document.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so you can view item availability data.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for the selected source warehouse and its locations and to add specific quantities of the items to the transfer document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Item** field.
Element Description
Item

The identifier of a particular item whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.

Barcode

The barcode of the item to be listed.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.

Item class ID

The item class of the items whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.

Show available items only If you select this check box, the system will list only items whose available quantities are greater than zero in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item are stocked.

Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of the stock item (under the specified item ID and subitem code) in the base units that you want to add to the transfer.
Warehouse The warehouse where the items are stocked.
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID and subitem code.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and branch of the batch generated upon release of the adjustment. If the **Update general ledger** option in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window is not selected, there will be no batch.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the transfer. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the transactions’ details.
Branch The branch associated with the adjustment.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500 page You can use this window to apply replenishment parameters the system has calculated according to the forecast models used, to stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500) You can use this window to apply replenishment parameters the system has calculated according to the forecast models used, to stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can initiate this calculation by using the [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/) window. After you apply the replenishment parameters, you can use the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/)window to view whether stock replenishment for the item is needed and in what quantities. For an overview of the functionality, see: [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Updates the replenishment parameters with the calculated values for the items you have selected in the table area.
Process all Updates replenishment parameters (by replacing them with the calculated values) for all the items listed in the table area to determine whether they should be replenished and in what quantities.
## The top part In this area, you specify the criteria the system uses to display the items in the **Items for replenishment** area.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the items to be shown are stocked. If you leave the field blank, the system displays the items of all warehouses.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Seasonality The set of replenishment seasonality settings assigned to the items to be displayed. You can leave this field blank to view the items with various seasonality settings.
Item class The item class of the items to be viewed. You can leave the field blank to view the items of various classes.
## The table This area has a table with the stock items that match all the criteria you have specified in the top part. During processing, replenishment parameters for the items will be replaced by the suggested parameters. You can manually adjust the suggested parameters before processing.
Column Description
Selected A check box you select to include this replenishment record in processing if you then click Process.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock will be replenished.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is required.
Override default supplier A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that the default supplier is overridden for the warehouse.
Default supplier The default supplier from which the item is generally purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can choose another supplier if necessary.
Default location

The location of the supplier from which the item is purchased by default. You can choose another supplier location if necessary.

Note

This field is only available if the Account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.

Replenishment class The replenishment class assigned to the item.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates (if selected) that the replenishment settings of the item have been overridden for the warehouse.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings for the item.
Replenishment method The replenishment method assigned to the item.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the maximum shelf life parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the item can be stocked.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the safety stock parameter has been overridden for this warehouse.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the stock item as specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock according to the forecast and the selected service level.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the reorder point quantity of the item has been overridden for the warehouse.
Reorder point

The stock level that, when it has been reached, prompts the system to replenish the stock of the stock item.

The minimum quantity of the stock item is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.

Reorder point suggested The reorder point quantity, according to the forecast.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity of the item that can be stocked.
Max. qty. suggested The maximum quantity of the item according to the forecast.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the maximum quantity of the item has been overridden for the warehouse.
Last forecast date The date of the last demand forecast.
Last forecast results application date The date when the last demand forecast was applied.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand for an item, according to the last forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error for the daily demand according to the forecast.
Lead time average The average lead time according to the forecast.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation for the average lead time according to the forecast.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500 page Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500) Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. The system calculates the parameters according to the selected demand forecasting model and the seasonality settings assigned to each item on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. For more information, see: [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process For the items you have selected, calculates the replenishment parameters according to the demand forecast method assigned to the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Process all Calculates the replenishment parameters for all items listed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can select the criteria the system uses to display the items in the table below.
Element Description
Forecast date The date of forecast calculation.
Action

Select one of the following options:

  • Calculate: Use this option to calculate the replenishment parameters.

  • Clear: Use this option to clear the calculations for the selected Forecast date.

    Note

    You must be especially careful when using this option if the demand forecast method that is used for calculations depends on the results of the previous calculations.

Warehouse

The warehouse where the items to be displayed are stocked.

If you leave the field blank, the system displays the items of all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Seasonality The seasonality settings assigned to the items to be shown. You can leave the field blank to view items with various seasonality settings.
Item class ID The item class of the items to be viewed. You can leave the field blank to view items of multiple classes.
## The Replenishment area Use this area to view the stock items that match all the criteria you have specified.
Column Description
Warehouse The warehouse of the stock item.
Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is configured.
Override preferred supplier This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the preferred supplier is overridden.
Default supplier The preferred supplier from which the item is generally purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can select another supplier if necessary.
Default location

The location of the supplier from which the item is purchased by default. You can select another supplier location if necessary.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Accounts locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Replenishment class The replenishment class assigned to the item.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the replenishment settings has been overridden for the item at the warehouse.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings for the item.
Replenishment method The replenishment method assigned to the item.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Replenishment warehouse

The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the maximum shelf life parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the item can be stocked.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the safety stock parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the reorder point quantity has been overridden for the warehouse.
Reorder point The stock level that, when it has been reached, will prompt the system to replenish the stock of the item. The minimum quantity of the stock item is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the max. quantity has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity of the item that can be stocked.
Last forecast date The date of the last demand forecast.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand according to the last forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error for the daily demand according to the forecast.
Lead time average The average lead time according to the forecast.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation for the average lead time according to the forecast.
Reorder point suggested The quantity (reorder point quantity) according to the forecast.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock according to the forecast and the selected service level.
Max. qty. suggested The maximum quantity of the item according to the forecast.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Close financial periods (IN509000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/close-financial-periods-in509000 section You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (IN509000) You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. (The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it is closed in the Supplier ledger, Cash management, Customer ledger, and Inventory workspaces.) When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well if they have not already been closed. > [!NOTE] > Posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed unless you have selected the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the chosen financial periods or those for which you have selected the check box in the Financial periods area.

Note

When the operation is completed successfully, the icon-confirmation icon is displayed. The icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.

Unreleased Documents Generates the list of unreleased inventory documents for the selected financial periods (that is, the periods you have selected in the table), so you can view their details. The system generates this report in the PDF format and opens the created document.
Unposted to Inventory documents Opens the All unreleased documents (GL65601S) report, which displays a list of all transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period.
## The top part This area has a table showing all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. Select one or more periods for closing and click **Close periods** in the window toolbar. A period can only be closed if there are no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, and **Released** statuses to be posted to this period.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description A description of the financial period.
Active If you select this check box, the financial period can be used for posting transactions. This check box is read-only; to change the state of the financial period, use the Financial periods (GL201000) window.

Related pages

Windows

FOB points (CS208500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/fob-points-cs208500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # FOB points (CS208500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of FOB (which means **freight on board** or **free on board** ) points. At these FOB points, the supplier delivers the goods and pays for the freight (cargo) to be loaded to the transportation provided by the carrier. The freight and other expenses for the cargo from that point are borne by the customer. ## The FOB points table You use the buttons in the table toolbar to add a new FOB point or sort or to remove existing FOB points. After you have added a new FOB point to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Column Description
FOB point ID

The ID of the point (such as a city or town) where the title of goods passes from the company to the customer or from the supplier to the company.

You can use up to 20 characters, both letters and numbers.

Description A description of the FOB point. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

Related pages

Windows

Inventory allocation details (IN402000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000 page By using this window, you can view how a selected stock item is distributed among warehouses and warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory allocation details (IN402000) By using this window, you can view how a selected stock item is distributed among warehouses and warehouse locations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The typical user of this window is a warehouse manager or a salesperson, who uses it to find out which items are available, check the availability and location of a single item and reallocate items if necessary. You also can view the on-hand (book) quantity and actual quantity of the stock item according to unreleased documents. You can set up filters to display only the data you want to view. The quantities displayed in the window are calculated automatically, based on the availability calculation options defined for the item class associated with the stock item. These settings are specified on the **General settings** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The top part By using the first five elements in this area, you can select the most relevant data to be displayed in the table for your information needs. This area also includes informational elements that show the base unit of the item and the distribution of the available quantity of the selected stock item according to various unreleased documents. The **[*]** notation indicates that the quantities of the stock item at the locations marked as **Except loc. not available** are not included in the displayed value. > [!NOTE] > This notation is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The **[**]** notation indicates that the quantities of the stock item at the locations marked as **Except expired and loc. not available** , as well as the quantities of expired items, are not included in the displayed value. > [!NOTE] > This notation is only displayed if the **Lot and serial tracking** and the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionalities in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window are enabled.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, where you can view the availability data of the stock item.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data. You must select an item.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information about the stock item in all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information on all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information not split by lot or serial numbers.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Base unit

Read only.

This field shows the unit of measure (UoM) used as a base unit for this stock item.

On hand

Read only.

This field shows the quantity on hand for this stock item.

Total addition

Read only.

This field shows the total quantity of stock item to be added to the on-hand quantity at the warehouse.

Computation is performed in accordance with availability calculation options specified for the item class.

Total deduction

Read only.

This field shows the total quantity of stock item to be deducted from the on-hand quantity at the warehouse.

Computation is performed in accordance with availability calculation options specified for the item class.

Available

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item available at the warehouses.

It is the sum of the quantity on hand plus the total addition value and minus the total deduction value.

Available for shipping

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the item available for shipping from this location.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with the quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

On loc. not available

The quantity of the stock item stored at locations not included in the availability calculation.

For each warehouse location, the Include in qty. available option in the Warehouses (IN204000) window defines whether the quantity of items stored at this location is included in the quantity of available items.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If the functionality is disabled, all items from a single location (the MAIN location) are always available for shipping.

Expired [*]

The quantity of the stock item that has expired, based on the expiration date specified for the lot.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Sales order prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on sales orders of the Sales, Common settings, and Inventory types with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, and Pending approval statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on sales prepared option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Sales orders booked [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on unreleased sales orders.

This value is calculated as the total quantity of the item included in all sales orders after deduction of the quantities of shipped items and items being shipped.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on customer orders option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Sales orders allocated [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unconfirmed shipments.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. shipping check box is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Sales orders shipped [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item shipped according to the confirmed shipments.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. shipped option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Back orders [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on sales orders with the Back order status. Also includes the unallocated quantities (those which are unavailable at the specified locations) for On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open orders of SA order type.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on back orders option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Inventory issues [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in the inventory issue documents that were not released yet.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on issues option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Sales order to purchase

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Sales order to drop-ship

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for drop-ship orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item calculated for all purchase orders that are not yet open, that is, are in the On hold or Pending approval status.

This value affects the Available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase prepared option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window (as reflected by a read-only check field to the right of the field).

Purchase orders

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on all open purchase orders that affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Purchase order receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased purchase receipts, which affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders receipts option is set for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

Inventory receipts [*]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased receipts.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on receipts option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

In transit [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased incoming two-step inventory transfers.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. in transit option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).

In transit to sales order Quantity of the stock item in transit to sales order.
Purchase for sales order (prepared)

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders created for back orders and not yet open.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Purchase for sales order

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on open purchase orders created for sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Sales order receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on purchase receipts that were created for back orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Drop-ship for sales order, prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on drop-ship sales orders in the of On hold or Pending approval status.

This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Drop-ship for sales order

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on open drop-ship sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Drop-ship for sales order, receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on receipts for drop-ship sales orders.

This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

## The table In this table, you can view detailed information matching the criteria specified in the **Selection** area about the allocation of the selected stock item.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where the document with the availability information about this stock item originated.
Allocation type The type of allocation for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Allocation date The date of the allocation.
Document type The type of document used as a source of allocation information about the specified quantity of the stock item.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document used as a source of allocation information about the specified quantity of the stock item.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the specified quantity of the stock item was allocated.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location where the specified quantity of the stock item was allocated.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number assigned to the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Qty. The quantity of the item allocated at the specified location.
Account ID The identifier of the business account associated with the allocation.
Account name The company name of the business account associated with the allocation.
Loc. not available This check box indicates (if selected) that this quantity is not available (for example, broken) at the location.
Expired This check box indicates (if selected) that the expiration date for quantity has passed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000 page In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000) In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. You can locate a particular unit of the stock item by its lot or serial number. > [!NOTE] > This window is only displayed when the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Element Description
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number for which you want to view transaction information.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses and Multiple warehouse locations functionalities in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window are enabled.

Item ID The stock item for which you want to view transaction information.
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Include landed cost in unit cost A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system displays in the Unit cost column the sum of item unit cost and landed cost which is taken from a purchase receipt (if any) associated with the item.
## The table This area displays the details of the transactions that meet the criteria you specified in the **Selection** area.
Button Description
Summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Opens the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window as a pop-up to display information about how the selected stock item is allocated at the specified warehouse.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item involved in the transaction.
Trans. date The transaction date.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number assigned to the unit or units with the specified item ID.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified unit or units under the same lot or serial number.
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Quantity The quantity of the item in the specified UoM.
Unit cost The cost of the item for the specified UoM.
Sales order type The type of the order that the inventory transaction is based on.
Order no. The reference number of the order that the transaction is based on.
Customer no. The number of the customer on the sales order that the transaction is based on.
Customer name The name of the customer on the sales order that the transaction is based on.
Purchase receipt type The type of the receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Supplier The ID of the supplier on the purchase receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Supplier name The name of the supplier on the purchase receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Released If this check box is selected, the inventory document has been released.
Description The description of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Inventory preferences (IN101000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000 page You use this window to configure the Inventory workspace to suit your business. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory preferences (IN101000) You use this window to configure the Inventory workspace to suit your business. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The settings include global settings for stock items to be used in all workspaces, settings defining integration with the General ledger workspace, and inventory-specific settings, such as numbering sequences used for inventory-related documents, transactions, and stocktaking. ## The General information tab This tab contains groups of settings used to configure the Inventory workspace. ### The Number series section You use the elements in this section to assign number series for all types of inventory documents.
Element Description
Batches The number series to be used to assign reference numbers to batches generated for inventory documents.
Receipts/transfers The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during receipt and transfer warehouse operations.
Issues The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during issue warehouse operations.
Adjustments The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during adjustment warehouse operations.
Kit assemblies The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during kit assembly warehouse operations.
Stocktakings The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during stocktaking operations.
Replenishments The series to be used to generate reference numbers for replenishment documents.
### The Inventory options section This group of element includes price and cost calculation decimal precision and units to measure volume and weight.
Element Description
Reschedule back orders A check box that you select to indicate that the system should reschedule received quantities (update plan types) for sales orders with the back order status on release of inventory receipts. If this option is selected, you can run the Create shipments process in the Process orders (SO501000) window for back orders that can be fulfilled by the received quantities. If this option is not selected, after release of receipts, you have to open the back orders first (by using the Open orders action in the Process orders (SO501000) window) when you need to create shipments or you have to create shipments for back orders on a per-order basis.
### The Account settings section By using these elements, you can specify the appropriate accounts and subaccounts for inventory transactions.
Element Description
Clearing account customers The account to be used as an customer ledger clearing account for inventory transactions.
Clearing subaccount customers The subaccount to be used with the customer ledger clearing account.
In-transit branch The branch assigned to the in-transit warehouse, which is a hidden warehouse stock items become associated with when they have been issued from the source warehouse but have not yet been delivered to the destination warehouse. This field is available only if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
In-transit account The account to be used to accumulate the amounts on uncompleted transfers.
In-transit sub. The subaccount to be used with the in-transit account.
Work in progress account

The account to be used for work-in-progress transactions generated for kits in the processes of kit assembly and disassembly.

Note

This field is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Work in progress sub.

The subaccount to be used for the work-in-progress transactions generated for kits.

Note

This field is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

### The Posting settings section Here you can specify how inventory transactions are posted to the general ledger, and what the retention period is for inventory transactions.
Element Description
Update general ledger This check box (if selected) causes the inventory transactions to be posted to the General ledger.
Post summary when updating the general ledger This check box (if selected) allows posting of batches with summary data to the General ledger. For these transactions, accounts that allow posting of summary values should be used.
Automatically post on release This check box (if selected) causes inventory batches to be posted to the General ledger automatically once the inventory documents are released.
### The Data entry section You use these elements to specify data entry-related settings to be used in the Inventory workspace.
Element Description
Hold documents on entry

This check box indicates (if selected) that new documents will be saved by default with the On hold status.

If the check box is cleared, the documents by default can be saved in the Balanced status.

Validate document totals on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that the user will need to enter the document control total before saving the document.
Add one unit per bar code This check box indicates (if selected) that the item quantity on the receipt should be increased by one unit each time an item bar code is entered into the system, manually or by using a bar code scanner.
Automatically add receipt line for bar code This check box indicates (if selected) that when a bar code scanner is used, lines should be added to receipts automatically once a bar code is scanned or entered.
Default stock item class

The default stock item class to be used to provide default settings for new items of the class and for new item classes.

The stock item classes are defined using the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Default non-stock item class

The default non-stock item class to be used to provide default settings for new items of the class and for new item classes.

The non-stock item classes are defined using the Item classes (IN201000) window.

### The Default reason codes section In this section, you specify the reason codes to be used in the Inventory workspace.
Element Description
Receipt reason code The reason code to be used by default for generated receipts. You define the receipt reason codes, as well as the accounts and subaccounts related to these reason codes, by using the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Reason code issue/return The reason code to be used by default for all generated issue documents. You also define the issue reason codes, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Adjustment reason code The reason code to be used by default for all generated adjustments. You define the adjustment reason codes, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Stocktaking reason code The reason code to be used by default for all adjustment documents generated as the result of stocktaking. You define the stocktaking reason code, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
### The Stocktaking settings section
Element Description
Use tags If you select this check box, Visma Net will use inventory tags for physical inventories. If you do not select this check box, the system will generate inventory documents with line numbers only.
Last tag number

The number of the last tag generated for physical inventory in the current financial year. Only digits are allowed. When the next physical inventory document ins generated, this value, incremented by 1, will be used as the first tag number in the document. Other tag numbers for the physical inventory document are generated successively by incrementing the previous tag number by 1.

We recommend that you specify a relatively large number (for example 1000 or 10 000) as the Last tag number when you enter it for the first time. This makes the tag number s clearly distinguishable for the quantities specified on the tags. Then the users will not confuse tag number #1001 with a count quantity of 1 as they could with tag number #1 and a quantity of 1.

Turnover periods per year The number of periods per year used to calculate the turnover for stock items. You can enter one of the following numbers here: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or 12.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Weight UoM Here you can select the required unit of measurement.

Related pages

Tasks

Inventory summary (IN401000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000 page You use this window to view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory summary (IN401000) You use this window to view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The typical user of this window is a warehouse manager or salesperson, who wants to have information about the stock available in your company's warehouse. The information is grouped by location, so that you can see where specific items are located. You can specify criteria to filter the data to be displayed. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Element Description
Slow mover

Select this check box to see stock items that have had minimal customer demand based on the quantity on hand for a longer period of time.

By selecting this check box, the field Not moved since becomes available, where you select a date.

Not moved since

Select a date to show slow moving stock items.

Note

This field only appears if the Slow mover check box is selected.

Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data. You must select an item.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data.

Select a warehouse to view its data, or leave the field blank to view the data of the item at all warehouses.

Note

This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Expand by lot/serial number

A check box that you select to view the data related to each lot or serial number for the selected item on a separate line in the table.

Clear the check box to instead view summary data for the item.

Note

This field only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view data; select a location, or make no selection to view data for all locations.

Note

This element only appears if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

## The table In this table, you can view the availability data of the stock item, filtered by the settings in the top part. The availability data is calculated based on the availability calculation options selected for the item class on the **General settings** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window.
Column Description
Item ID The selected stock item. Click the link in the Item ID column to open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window, where you can see more details about the allocation of the item.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the selected stock item is available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Location

The location where the selected stock item is available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Available The quantity of the stock item available at the specific warehouse and location.
Available for shipment The quantity of the stock item available for shipment at the specific warehouse and location, which is calculated based on the quantity on hand with the quantity of shipped items and items being shipped deducted.
Available for Issue The quantity of the stock item available for issue at the specific warehouse and location, which is calculated based on the quantity on hand with the shipped quantity deducted.
Not available The quantity of the stock item on locations for which the Include in qty. available option is not selected.
Sales order prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on sales orders of the SO, CS, and IN types with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, and Pending approval statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on sales on hold option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window. To view the list of sales orders, open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Sales order booked

The quantity of the stock item booked according to sales orders.

This value is calculated as the total quantity of the stock item included in all sales orders after deduction of the quantities of shipped items and items being shipped.

To view the list of sales orders, open the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

Sales orders allocated

The quantity of the stock item currently being shipped according to the unconfirmed shipments. This value also includes the quantities on orders of the SA type with On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, Rejected, and Open statues; it also includes the quantities specifically allocated for sales orders of the SO type with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Open statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. allocated check box is selected for the item class. If the Multiple warehouses and Sales order to purchase order link features are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the sales orders allocated quantity includes the quantities on transfer orders based on sales orders.

Sales orders shipped

The quantity of the stock item shipped according to the confirmed shipments; also includes the quantities on open orders of the CS and IN types.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on shipments option is selected for the item class.

Back orders

The quantity of the stock item on sales orders with the Back order status. Also includes the unallocated quantities (those which are unavailable at the specified locations) for On Hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open orders of SA order type.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on back orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Inventory issues

The quantity of the stock item included in the inventory issue documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on issues option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Inventory receipts

The quantity of the stock item included in the inventory receipt documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on receipts option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

In transit

The quantity of the stock item included as in-transit quantities in the inventory transfer documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. in transit option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

In transit to sales order

The quantity of the stock item on transfer orders (not yet released) that were generated for sales order allocations.

Note

This column is available only if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

In assembly demand

The quantity of the stock item included in unreleased kit assembly documents as components or kits, depending on whether the item is a kit or a kit component.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Note

This column is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

In assembly supply

The quantity of the stock item listed on unreleased kit assembly documents. This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. of kit assembly supply option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Note

This column is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses.

This value affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase on hold option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Purchase orders

The quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders. To view the purchase orders, open the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This value affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Purchase order receipts

The quantity of the stock item included in the purchase receipts that have not yet been released. To view the purchase receipts, open the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase order receipts option is set for the item class.

Expired

The quantity of the stock item that has reached its expiration date.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

On hand The quantity of the stock item available on hand at the specified warehouse and location.
Sales order to purchase The quantity of the stock item included in unreleased sales orders requiring creating purchase orders.
Purchase for sales order

The quantity of the stock item listed on open purchase orders created for sales orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase for sales order (prepared)

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses created for back orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase for sales order receipts

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase receipts for orders that were created for sales orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Sales order to drop-ship

The quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for drop-ship orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Drop-ship for sales order

The quantity of the stock item listed on open drop-ship orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Drop-ship for sales order, prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on drop-ship sales orders with a status of On hold or Pending approval; this value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Drop-ship for sales order, receipts

The quantity of the stock item listed on receipts for drop-ship sales orders; this value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.

Base unit The unit of measure (UoM) selected as the base unit for the stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Estimated unit cost The estimated unit cost of the selected stock item.
Estimated total cost The estimated total cost of the stock item available at the specified warehouse and location.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Inventory transactions by account (IN403000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000 page In this window, you can view detailed information about a selected account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transactions by account (IN403000) In this window, you can view detailed information about a selected account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, from which you can view the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window, from which you can view information about how the selected stock item is currently distributed among warehouses and locations.
Element Description
Inventory account The inventory account for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
Period The financial period for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
By financial period A check box that you select to view the inventory transactions grouped by financial period.
Item ID The stock item for which data will be displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which data will be displayed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to display only summary values for each day in the table. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the selected period.
Period start date

Read only.

This value displays the start date of the selected financial period.

Period end date

Read only.

This value displays the end date of the selected financial period.

## The table
Column Description
Account The account used to post the inventory transaction.
Subaccount The subaccount used to post the inventory transaction.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type, which can be a transaction type related to an inventory operation, or a transaction type, used in another system workspace if the account was shared by both that workspace and the Inventory workspace.

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment
  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Item ID The stock item used in this inventory transaction.
Cost sub item

The sub item of the stock item if item cost is split by sub item segment values.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Stocky sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Warehouse

The warehouse where the transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location (if costed)

The location where the transaction was performed.

Note

You can only select locations for which the Cost separately check box on the Locations table tab in the Warehouses (IN204000) window is selected.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Cost adjustment A read-only check box which (if selected) indicates that cost adjustment was generated for the transaction.
Date The transaction date.
Beginning balance The account beginning balance (before the transaction).
Debit The debit amount related to the transaction.
Credit The credit amount related to the transaction.
Ending balance The account’s ending balance (after the transaction).
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period when the transaction was created.
Qty. The quantity of the stock item involved in the transaction.
Unit cost The unit cost of the stock item used in this transaction.
Description The transaction description.
Sales order type The type of order for items sold or to be sold.
Sales order no. The number of the sales order for items sold or to be sold.
Purchase order receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt for items purchased.

Related pages

Tasks

Inventory transaction details (IN404000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000 page You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction details (IN404000) You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. You can set up criteria to display only specific data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window so you can view information about the allocation of the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
Period (Required) The financial period for which you want to view inventory transactions.
By financial period (without running values) A check box that you select to display the inventory transactions by financial period, and to not display the running values ( Beginning quantity, Ending quantity, Beginning balance, and Ending balance ) in the table. If the check box is cleared, the inventory transactions will be selected by the date range in the specified financial period and the running values will be displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item ID The stock item for which you want to view inventory transactions.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view inventory transactions. A value can be selected only for stock items with lot or serial numbers.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Sub item

The subitem of the stock item for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Stock sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to view only summary values for each day in the specified period. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the specified period.
Include unreleased (without costs)

A check box that you select to view unreleased transactions along with posted transactions.

All types of transactions will be displayed without costs.

Period start date

Read only.

This value shows the start date of the selected financial period.

Period end date

Read only.

This value shows the end date of the selected financial period.

## The table This table displays the details of inventory transactions that meet the criteria you have specified in the **top part**. Values for columns marked with **[*]** are calculated based on the estimated per-unit cost, which depends on the valuation method selected for the stock item. For details about valuation methods and per-unit costs, see: [About the cost of inventory](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory/) and [About item costs and valuation methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods/).
Column Description
Date The date when the inventory transaction was performed.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Stock sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number involved in the inventory transaction.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period in which the transaction was created.
Released This check box (if selected) indicates that the transaction was released.
Beginning qty The quantity of the stock item in the beginning of the selected period.
Qty. in The quantity of the stock item accepted at the warehouse within the selected period.
Qty. out The quantity of the stock item removed from the warehouse within the selected period.
Ending qty. The quantity of the stock item at the end of the selected period.
Beginning balance [*] The inventory balance in the beginning of the selected period.
Cost in [*] The cost of the stock items accepted at the warehouse within the selected period.
Cost out [*] The cost of the stock items removed from the warehouse within the selected period.
Ending balance [*] The inventory balance at the end of the selected period.
Unit cost in/out [*] The cost of the unit of the item of inventory involved in the inventory transactions within the selected period.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order involved.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the purchase order involved.
Doc. type The type of the documents within the selected period.
Grid line no. The number of the grid line.
Item ID The ID of the selected stock item.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Inventory transaction history (IN405000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000 page You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction history (IN405000) You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. You can set up criteria to view only particular data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window to display information about how the selected stock item is allocated at the specified warehouse.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view transaction information.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view inventory transactions (if the stock item has lot or serial numbers).

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to display only the summary information for each day in the table. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the selected period.
Include unreleased A check box that you select to display the non-released transactions along with released transactions in the table.
Include landed cost in unit cost A check box that you select to include the landed cost in unit cost.
## The table In this area, you can view the details of the transactions that meet the criteria you have specified in the **top part**.
Column Description
Date The transaction date.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number involved in the inventory transaction.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction has been released.
Beginning qty. The quantity of the selected stock item available at this warehouse before the inventory transaction was made.
Qty. in The quantity of the selected stock item that were received at this warehouse as the result of the inventory transaction.
Qty. out The quantity of the selected stock item that were issued from this warehouse as the result of the inventory transaction.
Ending qty. The quantity of the selected stock item that were available at this warehouse after the inventory transaction was made.
Unit cost The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the purchase order.
Created by The person who created the inventory transaction.
Doc. type The type of the document
Grid line no. The number of the grid line.
Item ID The stock item of the inventory transaction.
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period when the transaction was created.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000 page Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. You can use selection criteria to display only particular data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
View
Inventory transaction details
Navigates to the Inventory transaction details (IN404000) window to display detailed transaction data for the selected stock item.
Summary
Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details
Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window to display information about the allocation of the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view data. This is a required element.
By financial period A check box that you select to group the inventory transactions in the table by financial period.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which you want to view data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses and Multiple warehouse locations functionalities in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data.
Show items without movement A check box that you select to display information on stock items for which no inventory transactions were made within the selected period.
Use these check boxes to select the detail level of the data displayed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse details

If you select this check box, the system displays the warehouse data in a single row of the table shown below.

Clear this check box to show the summary information for all warehouses.

Location details

If you select this check box, the system displays the location data in a single row of the table shown below.

Clear this check box to show the summary data for all locations.

## The table This table displays the transaction summary data by using the criteria you have specified in the top part. Your selections in the check boxes in the top part affect whether or not some of these columns appear.
Column Description
Period The financial period of the transaction summary data.
Item ID The stock item for which the transaction summary data is displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the transaction summary data is displayed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Warehouse details check box is selected, and if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location for which the transaction summary data is displayed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Location details check box is selected, and if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Beginning qty. The beginning quantity of the stock item (at the start of the selected period).
Issued The issued quantity of the stock item for the selected period.
Received The received quantity of the stock item for the selected period.
Sales The quantity of the stock item in sales operations for the selected period.
Credit notes The quantity of the stock item on credit note documents for the selected period.
Drop-ship sales

The quantity of the stock item included in the drop ship orders within the selected period.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop-shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Transfer in The quantity of the stock item transferred into the warehouse within the selected period.
Transfer out The quantity of the stock item transferred out of the warehouse within the selected period.
Adjusted The quantity of the stock item on adjustment documents created within the selected period.
Ending qty. The quantity of the stock item at the end of the selected period.
Description The description of the item.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Issues (IN302000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000 page By using this window, you can create, view, and edit issue documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Issues (IN302000) By using this window, you can create, view, and edit issue documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can save issues with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and release them. The way issues are processed depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The system validates totals on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected, and on an issue release, the transactions will be posted to the General ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. For more information about inventory issues, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the release of the issue, which changes the status of the issue to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports:

## The top part In this area, you can select an existing issue by its reference number or provide summary information about a new issue.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the issue, which the system automatically assigns in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to issues in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the issue document. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited manually or deleted. A document with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Means that the document transactions are balanced. This document can be modified, deleted, or released.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. Documents with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that, if selected, indicates that the issue document has the On hold status. You can clear the check box to save it with the Balanced status.
Date The date when the issue document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which transactions from the document should be posted.
External ref. The external reference number of the inventory issue document (for example, the supplier’s reference code).
Description A brief description of the inventory issue or its transactions.
Total qty. The total quantity of stock items, which the system calculates automatically, for the document.
Control qty. The manually entered quantity of stock items. Control qty. is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the issue cannot be saved.
Total amount The total amount, calculated as a sum of amounts for all inventory issue operations included in this issue document.
Control amount The manually entered summary amount for all specified stock items. Control amount is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. If the Control amount and Total a mount values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the issue cannot be saved.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table with the transactions included in the issue document.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, from which you can define locations, lot or serial numbers, quantities, and expiration dates for the stock item received.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add an item to the receipt.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so that you can view item availability data.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the inventory issue operation.
Trans. type

The type of inventory issue transaction. Select one of the following types:

Issue
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued from the warehouse. The quantity of issued items will be subtracted from the quantity of items available at the warehouse.
Return
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item was returned to the warehouse. The quantity of returned items will be added to the quantity of items available at the warehouse.
Invoice
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued based on an invoice; the system generates this type of transaction on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of items in this transaction will be subtracted from the quantity of the items available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger workspace.
Debit note
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued from the warehouse based on a debit note; the system also generates this type of transaction on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of the item in this transaction will be deducted from the quantity of the item available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger.
Credit note
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is received at the warehouse based on a credit note; this type of transaction is also generated by the system on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of the item in this transaction will be added to the quantity of inventory available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger workspace.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item. Stock items are maintained by using the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse from which the item is issued.
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse location from which the item is issued.
Quantity The quantity of the specified item (in the units of measure indicated below).
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Unit price The price of the specified unit of this stock item.
Manual amount The extended price of the specified stock item, calculated automatically as the unit price multiplied by the quantity of the stock item involved in the inventory issue operation. The value can be edited manually later, for example, to round up or down the value.
Unit cost The cost of the specified unit of this stock item.
Cost The extended cost of the specified stock item. An extended cost is calculated automatically as the unit cost multiplied by the quantity of units involved in this transaction. The value can be edited manually later, for example, to round up the number.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the stock item. To specify the lot or serial numbers of the particular units, click Allocations in the table toolbar. If multiple serial or lot numbers were specified, the column displays <SPLIT>. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified stock item. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Reason code The reason code for the inventory transaction.
Project The project with which this transaction is associated, or the code indicating that this transaction is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. This column appears if the Projects module has been enabled and activated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this transaction is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been enabled and activated.
Description A brief description of the transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can split an issue transaction into several records when units of the stock item are picked from different locations or have different lot, or serial numbers. Also, you can assign lot or serial numbers to stock items if such numbers are to be assigned on issue. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from The lot or serial number to be used as a start number. This field appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Generate (button) A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers. (This button appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Column Description
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse.
Lot/serial no. (This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same sub item code and the same lot number. It is 1 for items with serial numbers.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date (This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.
Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for various warehouses and warehouse locations (if the **Warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system) and to add the required quantity of the item to the document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field.
Element Description
Item The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item’s item ID to find the it.
Barcode The bar code of the item to be listed. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Item class ID The item class of the items whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Warehouse (This field is available for selection only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse where the item are stocked. Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.
Location (This field appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.
Show available items only A check box that you select if only items whose available quantities are greater than zero should be listed in the table.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the stock item that you want to add to the document.
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the items are stocked.
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse.
Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and the branch of the batch generated upon release of the issue.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the issue. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the details of the transactions.
Branch The branch that issues the products.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Item classes (IN201000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000 section In this window, you can define item classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item classes (IN201000) In this window, you can define item classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can browse through the existing item classes and modify their settings, add new classes, and delete unused (unpopulated) classes from the system. ## What to do from this window ## The table toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can use to invoke actions:

View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by item class (IN103010) window so you can view the restriction group members.
Apply to children
Applies the settings of the currently selected item class to all its child item classes.
Change ID
Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, in which you can enter a new identifier (ID) for the item class.
Apply restriction settings to all items
Updates the security settings for all items of the class if the default restriction groups of the class have been reassigned.
## The top part In this area, you can enter the identifier and description for a new item class, or select an existing class for viewing or modification.
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the item class.
Description

A description of the item class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The General information tab This tab holds the basic settings of the item class, including the unit conversion rules for it. ### The General information section
Element Description
Stock item If you select this check box, this class only includes stock items.
Allow negative quantity

If you select this check box, negative quantities for items of this class are allowed.

Note

This setting should be avoided in your day-to day operations, as it will lead to differences between the physical values and the system values. This makes it difficult to do an inventory reconciliation. The reason why this setting exists is because there may be a need to allow negative quantities in given situations, where the warehouse needs to be corrected.

Webhook notification If you select this check box, Webhook notifications are enabled for the item class.
Item type

The item type that will be selected by default for new items of this item class.

For stock items, you can select one of the following options:

  • Finished good
  • Component part
  • Subassembly

For non-stock items, you can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock item
Labour
A type of non-stock item to be used for labour hour rates
Service
A type of non-stock item to be used for service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used for charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses

The types of non-stock items are used mostly for informational purposes, except for the Labour; the items of this type appear on the lists filtered by Labour item type for selection in specific UI elements in windows related to project accounting, organisation structure, and employee time and expenses.

Valuation method

The valuation method to be assigned by default to all stock items of the class.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Standard
  • Average
  • FIFO
  • Specific
Note

The option Specific only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Posting class

The posting class selected for the item class.

Use the Posting classes (IN206000) window to define posting classes and their settings.

Lot/serial class

The lot/serial class to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define lot/serial classes and their settings.

Note

This element only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Price class

The price class to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

Use the Item price classes (IN209000) window to define lot/serial classes and their settings.

Default warehouse

The warehouse that will be used by default for receiving and issuing the items of this item class.

Note

This element only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is used as the default warehouse.

### The VAT settings section
Element Description
VAT category

The VAT code to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

VAT categories are defined by using the VAT categories (TX205500) window.

Sales VAT category The VAT category for sales.
Export VAT category The VAT category for export sales.
Sales EU VAT category The VAT category for sales within the EU.
Exempt VAT sales VAT category The VAT category for VAT-exempt sales.
Expense VAT category The VAT category for purchases.
Import VAT category The VAT category for import purchases.
Expense EU VAT category The VAT category for import purchases within the EU.
Exempt VAT expense VAT category The VAT category for VAT-exempt purchases.
### The Availability calculation window By using the elements in this pop-up window that opens when you click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) in the **Availability calculation rule** field, you set the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to the item class.
Element Description
Availability calculation rule The unique ID of the availability calculation rule. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the availability calculation rule.
Deduct qty. on open issues

If you select this check box, the system deducts (for items of the class) the quantities of issued items from the available quantities of these items.

The documents in the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Deduct qty. on sales on hold

If you select this check box, the system will deduct the quantities of the item on sales orders (of the SO, IN, and CS types) with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Rejected statuses from the available quantity.

The quantity of each item on sales orders with these statuses is shown in the Sales order prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on sales orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items on sales orders with the Open status from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders booked field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on shipments

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of shipped items from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders shipped field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. allocated

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items being prepared for shipping (on unconfirmed shipments) and the quantities that were specifically allocated for sales orders (of the SA and SO types) from the available quantities of these stock items. The orders with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open statuses are used for this calculation.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders allocated field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated for kit assembly from the available quantities of these items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Deduct qty. on back orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated to sales orders with the Back order status from the available quantity of these items.

The quantities on these sales orders are shown in the Back orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on inventory receipts (with On hold and Balanced statuses) in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. in transit If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items in transit in the available quantities of these stock items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Include qty. on purchase order receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on unreleased purchase receipts in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. on purchase on hold

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on purchase orders (with the statuses of On hold and Pending approval ) in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses is shown in the Purchase prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on purchase orders

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on open purchase orders in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the Open status is shown in the Purchase orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. of kit assembly supply

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items that are kits and listed in the kit assembly documents in the available quantities of these items.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Include qty. on returns

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on return orders and on shipments with the Receipt operation selected (in the Shipments (SO302000) window) in the available quantities of these items. In particular, quantities are affected as follows:

  • The quantities on return orders with the On hold status are deducted from the Sales order prepared quantities.
  • The quantities on return orders with the Open status are deducted from the Sales orders booked quantities.
  • The quantities on unconfirmed shipments with the Receipt operation are deducted from the Sales orders allocated quantities.
  • The quantities on confirmed shipments are deducted from the Sales orders shipped quantities.

Thus, the quantities on shipments with the Receipt operation decrease the Total deduction quantities in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you specify a unit of measure (UoM) to be used as default base UoM for items of the item class. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled, you can specify the UoMs to be used as default sales and purchase units for items of the class. You can also define conversion rules for those units. For more details, see: [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/)
Element Description
Base unit

The UoM to be used as the default base unit for items of the class.

Select the base unit from the list of UoMs defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.

Sales unit

The UoM to be used as the default sales unit for items of the class.

Select this unit from the list of globally defined UoMs for which conversion factors to the chosen base unit are specified in the Units of measure (CS203100) window, or type the unit.

Press Enter, and a new row will be appended to the unit conversion table for the class. In this row, specify a conversion rule between the UoM selected as the sales unit and the UoM selected as the base unit.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase unit

The UoM to be used as the default purchase unit for items of the class.

Select the unit from the list of globally defined UoMs for which conversion factors to the chosen base unit are specified in the Units of measure (CS203100) window, or type the unit.

Press Enter, and a new row will be appended to the unit conversion table for the class. In this row, specify a conversion rule between the UoM selected as the purchase unit and the UoM selected as the base unit.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) for the system to mark the order as shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
### The Unit conversion table In the unit conversion table, you can define conversion rules between the UoMs set as the default purchase and sales units and the UoM set as the default base UoM for items of the class. You also can specify how other units of measure used for items of the class can be converted to the default base unit. > [!NOTE] > This conversion table is only displayed if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The UoM to be converted to the base unit.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for the unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform the appropriate conversion from the unit specified in the From unit column to the unit specified in the To unit column.

Conversion factor The factor to be used for conversion with the specified operation.
To unit The target unit for the unit conversion, which is the UoM selected as the base unit.
### The Price management section This section holds the price management settings for stock items of the class.
Element Description
Price work group The default work group responsible for pricing items of the class.
Price manager The default manager responsible for pricing items of the class.
Min. mark-up (%) The default minimum mark-up percentage required for items of the class.
Mark-up (%)

The default mark-up percentage for items of the class.

The mark-up is the difference between the price of the item and its cost, with respect to the cost.

## The Replenishment settings tab On this tab, you can create a list (in a tabular format) of replenishment classes that apply by default to stock items of the item class. Also, for each replenishment class, you can select a demand forecasting model and parameters for this model to be used in automatic replenishment.
Element Description
Demand calculation

The demand calculation option defines how the system calculates the item quantity for replenishment. You can select one of the following options:

Item class settings
Demand will be calculated based on the availability calculation rule for this item class as specified on the General information tab of this window.
Hard demand only
Demand will be calculated as (Qty. sales order allocated) + (Qty. sales order back ordered) + (Qty. sales order on shipments).
Column Description
Replenishment class ID The replenishment class that applies to items of this item class.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings to be used with the replenishment class, by its ID.
Source

The source of replenishment used for the item class with this replenishment class. One of the following options can be selected:

  • None No replenishment is required.

  • Purchase The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased.

  • Manufacturing The items for the stock replenishment will be manufactured. (Not implemented in the current version.)

  • Transfer The items will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Drop shipment The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased through drop shipment purchase orders, and the purchased goods will not be received at your company’s warehouse.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Purchase to order The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased only when a customer’s order has been received.

Method

The method of replenishment to be used for the class with this replenishment class. You can select one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. (The quantity on supply is the quantity of items on unreleased purchase orders, on purchase receipts, and in transit.)
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment once the minimum stock level is reached, and the quantity on replenishment request will be equal to the EOQ (economical order quantity) value specified for the selected supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse to serve as the source of replenishment if the source of replenishment is Transfer, Purchase to order, Drop shipment.
Stock transfer lead time The number of days required for transferring goods from the source warehouse.
Transfer ERQ The economic reasonable quantity (ERQ) for the item transfer. This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.
Demand forecast model

The model to be used for calculating the revised replenishment parameters for this replenishment class when applied to items of the item class. The following options are available:

None
None of the models will be used; replenishment parameters can be changed only manually.
Moving average
The demand forecast model is based on calculating average sales, based on historical data and seasonality settings.
Forecast period type

The type of time period to be used for selecting historical data for demand forecast model. The following options are available:

  • Quarter
  • Month
  • Week
  • Day
Periods to analyse The number of specified time periods for selecting historical data for the demand forecast model.
Launch date The date when the current replenishment settings become effective for replenishment of items of the class.
Termination date The date when the current replenishment settings of the replenishment class expire.
Service level (%)

The service level assigned to the item class.

Note

The default value is 84.0%, which results in zero level of safety stock.

For details on usage of the service level parameter, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast

## The Attributes tab This tab has a table with the attributes to be used for items of the item class and attribute properties, including order on the list of class attributes. To create a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute ID The identifier of the attribute.
Description A read-only column that displays the detailed description of the attribute.
Sort order

A number that represents the order of the attribute in the list of class attributes.

Type an integer directly in the column. The lower the integer, the higher the attribute will be in the list of class attributes.

Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for items of the class.
Control type

Read-only. This column displays the type of control (element) for the attribute:

  • Text
  • Combo
  • Check box
  • Date time

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Item warehouse details (IN204500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500 page This window is available only if the Warehouses functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item warehouse details (IN204500) This window is available only if the Warehouses functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, for each stock item, you can provide default storage settings, cost and price information, replenishment settings, and units of measure that are specific to the warehouses where the item is stored. For more details about stock items, see: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/). For more information about warehouses, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ## The top part In this area, you can select a stock item and a particular warehouse and view the details about the stock of the item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item, which may have specific properties in different warehouses. Select the item from this list.
Warehouse The specific warehouse where the selected stock item is stocked in this case.
Status

The status of the stock item at this warehouse. Select one of the available options:

Active
The stock item is available for inventory operations at this warehouse.
Inactive
The stock item is not available for inventory operations at this warehouse.
Product work group The product work group defined for the stock item at this warehouse.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this stock item at this warehouse.
## The General settings tab On this tab, you can define specific settings for the stock item when it is stocked at this warehouse, including the storage settings, the sales and purchase units specific for the item at this warehouse, the inventory account (and subaccount) to be used to post inventory transactions with the item originating in this warehouse, and the stocktaking parameters specific for the warehouse. ### The Storage defaults section Here you can specify the default issue and receipt locations for the selected stock item at the warehouse. > [!NOTE] > This section is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** option in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is selected. > [!NOTE] > If the functionality is not enabled, the **MAIN** location is automatically assigned as the default issue and default receiving locations.
Element Description
Default issue from The default location to issue the stock items from this warehouse.
Default receipt to The default location to receive the stock items at this warehouse.
### The Unit of measure section By using the elements in the this section, you can set the unit conversion rules for the units of measure (UoMs) used for the stock item at this warehouse. The base unit is not warehouse-specific; it is selected for the item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for use in all warehouses, but sales and purchase units can be warehouse-specific. Conversion rules are specified with respect to the base unit. For more information, see: [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is disabled, only the **Base unit** field is available (the **Sales unit** field, **Purchase unit** field, and the table are not displayed).
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
From unit The unit of measure to be converted to the base unit.
Multiply / divide

The operation to be performed for the unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform the appropriate conversion from the specified UoM to the base unit.

Conversion factor The factor to be used for conversion with the specified operation.
To unit The target unit for the unit conversion, which is the UoM chosen as the base unit for the selected item.
### The General ledger accounts section Here you can specify the general ledger accounts to which the inventory transactions related to the specific stock item at the particular warehouse should be posted.
Element Description
Override inventory account/sub. A check box you select to specify an inventory account and subaccount other than the default inventory account and subaccount for the warehouse.
Inventory account The asset account to be used to post inventory transactions related to this stock item at this warehouse.
Inventory sub. The subaccount to be used to post inventory transactions related to this stock item at this warehouse.
### The Stocktaking section The elements in this section hold the stocktaking settings for the particular stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
ABC code override This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code assigned for the selected stock item can be overridden for this warehouse.
ABC code The ABC code of the selected item at the selected warehouse.
Fixed ABC code This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code is fixed for the selected stock item at the warehouse.
Movement class override This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class assigned for the selected stock item can be overridden for this warehouse.
Movement class The movement class for the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Fixed movement class This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class is fixed for the chosen stock item at the specific warehouse.
## The Replenishment info tab Use this tab to specify the replenishment settings for the item at this warehouse. By default, the settings that were specified in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window are displayed, but you can override most of them. ### The Replenishment settings section
Element Description
Replenishment class The replenishment class to be used for this item at this warehouse.
Override replenishment settings A check box you select if you want to override the replenishment settings for this item at this warehouse defined by the selected replenishment class.
Seasonality

The set of seasonality settings (by its ID) to be used with the replenishment class, which the system uses to adjust the replenishment quantities to low and high seasons.

To define the seasonality settings, use the Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) window.

Replenishment source

The replenishment source to be used for this stock item in this warehouse. By default, it is the replenishment source associated with the item. You can select one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Purchase
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be purchased.
Manufacturing
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be manufactured.
Transfer
The requested quantity of the item will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Drop shipment
The option to be used as a default option for the item if this item is usually sold from this warehouse by using drop ship orders.
Purchase to order
The item will be purchased only when a customer order exists. The purchased item will not be received at any warehouse; the purchased quantity will be instead sent to the customer.
Replenishment method

The replenishment method to be used for this stock item for the selected replenishment source in this warehouse.

By default, it is the replenishment method associated with the item. The method can be one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed for the stock item.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. The quantity on supply is the quantity of the item on unreleased purchase orders, purchase receipts, and quantities in transit.
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment for the item once the minimum stock level is reached and the quantity on replenishment request is equal to the economical order quantity (EOQ) value specified for the chosen supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse to be used as the source of replenishment.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days that the stock item can be stored.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the maximum shelf life for this stock item at this warehouse.
Launch date The date starting the date range when the replenishment settings apply to the stock item as initially defined on Item classes window.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the launch date for this stock item in this warehouse.
Termination date The date ending the date range during which the replenishment settings apply to the stock item.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the termination date for this stock item at this warehouse.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to the item, affects the safety stock. For details, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the service level assigned to this stock item at this warehouse.
### The Replenishment parameters section
Element Description
Safety stock The quantity of the stock item that is maintained in the warehouse to prevent possible stockouts during the time period between initiation of replenishment and receiving of the requested supply.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the safety stock for this stock item in this warehouse.
Reorder point

The stock level that, upon its reach, should prompt the system to replenish the stock of the item at this warehouse.

Minimum quantities should be set equal to anticipated demand during the lead time plus a safety stock.

Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the reorder point for this stock item in this warehouse.
Max. qty.

The maximum stock level for the replenishment.

When the quantity of the item falls below the Reorder point value, the order should be issued to replenish the stock up to the Max. quantity value.

Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the maximum quantity for this stock item in this warehouse.
Economic transfer quantity

The economic reasonable quantity (ERQ) for the item transfer.

This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.

Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the transfer ERQ for this stock item in this warehouse.
### The Demand forecast result section
Element Description
Daily demand forecast The forecasted average daily demand for this item at this warehouse.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation calculated for average daily demand for this item in this warehouse.
Lead time average The average lead time calculated based on historical data.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation calculated for average lead time.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock of the item at this warehouse calculated based on the forecast and the specified service level.
Reorder point suggested The quantity to be used as the reorder point for stock item that is based on the forecast.
Last forecast date The date when the forecast was done last.
### The Preferred parameters section
Element Description
Override preferred supplier If you select this check box, the system overrides the preferred supplier for this item at this warehouse.
Preferred supplier The supplier from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment in this warehouse. By default, the preferred supplier specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window appears here.
Preferred location

The supplier location from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment in this warehouse.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Supplier lead time (days)

Read only.

This field shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.

Min. order freq. (days) The minimum purchase frequency for the item required when purchasing from this supplier.
Min. order qty. The minimum order quantity required for the item when purchasing from this supplier.
Max. order qty. The maximum order quantity of the item required when purchasing from this supplier.
Lot size The lot size for the item when purchased from this supplier.
EOQ

The economic order quantity (EOQ) when the item is purchased from this supplier.

This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total inventory holding costs and ordering costs.

## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view the standard cost and cost statistics for the selected stock item at the specified warehouse. You can also view the price management information for this stock item. ### The Standard cost section By using these elements, you can view the standard cost information related to the stock item.
Element Description
Override standard cost

This check box indicates (if selected) that the standard cost can be overridden.

Select this option to manually set the standard cost for the stock item at the warehouse.

Last cost The last cost used for the stock item.
Current cost

Read only.

This field displays the current cost of the stock item.

Effective date

Read only.

This field displays the effective date for the current cost value of the stock item.

Pending cost

The pending cost value for the stock item, which becomes effective on the Pending cost date.

This value can be set only if the Standard cost override check box is selected.

Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost value of the stock item will become effective.

This value can be set only if the Standard cost override check box is selected.

### The Price management section These settings provide information about the price work group and price manager responsible for the item price, as well as about the recommended price and standard costs of the stock item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Work group

The work group responsible for the product pricing of the item at this warehouse.

Select the group from the list of the groups that were defined in the Company tree (EP204060) window.

Price manager

The manager responsible for the product pricing of the item at this warehouse.

Select a company employee from the list of employees defined in the Employees (EP203000) window.

If you have selected a specific work group as the Price work group, the list of employees contains only the members of the selected work group.

Subject to commission This check box indicates (if selected) that commissions should be paid on sale of this stock item at this warehouse.
Override mark-up (%)

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the mark-up value can be overridden for this item in this warehouse.

Select this option to set the mark-up value for the stock item in this warehouse in the Mark-up (%) field.

Mark-up (%)

The mark-up percentage to be used for this item stored in this warehouse.

The mark-up is a percentage of cost added to the cost to get the selling price.

Override price This check box indicates (if selected) that the manufacturer’s suggested price for the item can be overridden for this warehouse.
List price

The manufacturer’s suggested price of the stock item.

This is the retail price suggested for stock item by its manufacturer.

### The Cost statistics section Here you can view the cost statistics data for the item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Last cost

Read only.

This field shows the last cost defined for the stock item.

Average cost

Read only.

This field shows the average cost value defined for the stock item.

Min. cost

Read only.

This field shows the minimum cost value defined for the stock item.

Max. cost

Read only.

This field shows the maximum cost value defined for the stock item.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Item price classes (IN209000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000 page This window displays a list of the item price classes available in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item price classes (IN209000) This window displays a list of the item price classes available in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use the window to add new classes or delete unused (unpopulated) classes. Item price classes are used to group stock items for base and sales price calculation. A price class may include items of one or more item classes. ## The table This area displays the item price classes defined in the system. You can add new price classes and delete any class to which no item has been assigned.
Column Description
Price class ID The alphanumeric ID of the price class. You can use 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description

A brief description of the price class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Related pages

Windows

Item sales categories (IN204060) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060 page In this window, you can create, delete, and manage the sales categories. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item sales categories (IN204060) In this window, you can create, delete, and manage the sales categories. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also view and update the list of stock items included in the sales categories. ## The Categories pane In this pane, the existing categories are represented as nodes. You click a node icon to the left of any category to expand the node and view the hierarchical structure of the category. Some categories have a one-level list of categories, while other workspaces have several levels. You click a category to view the items included in the category in the **Category members** table in the right pane. The toolbar on the pane includes only custom buttons, described below.
Button Description
Move node up Moves the selected node one level up in the tree within the parent node.
Move node down Moves the selected node one level down in the tree within the parent node.
Add category

Adds a subcategory to the category selected in the Categories pane.

Note

To add a new category on the first level, select your company name in the Categories pane.

Delete category Deletes the category selected in the Categories pane and all subcategories of the selected category.
## Right pane: The top part In the top part of the right pane, you can view and edit the description and the parent category of the category selected in the **Categories** pane.
Column Description
Description

The name of the selected category.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Parent category The parent category of the selected category.
## Right pane: The Category members table Use this table to view and update the lists of stock items included in the sales category selected in the **Category member** table.
Button Description
Add items Opens the Add items dialog box, which you can use to add all items of an item class or all items to the selected category. Select an item class in the Item class field, and then click Add to add all items of the class to the table. Or click Cancel to close the dialog box without any changes.
Column Description
Item ID The identifier of the stock item.
Description The description of the stock item.
Item class The item class of the stock item.
Item status The status of the stock item.
### Add items dialog box You use this dialog box to add all items of the selected class or all items to the item sales category you selected in the **Categories** pane.
Element Description
Add items

The drop-down list you use to select which items you want to add to the item sales category. The following options are available:

By class
Select this option, and then specify the item class in the Item class field to add all items of the selected class to the sales category.
All items
Select this option to add all inventory items to the sales category.
Item class The item class whose items you want to add to the item sales category. This field is available only when you select the By class option in the Add items drop-down list.
Add (button) Adds the selected items to the item sales category and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding any items to the item sales category.

Related pages

Windows

Kit assembly (IN307000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000 page This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouses, or Multiple warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Kit assembly (IN307000) This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouses, or Multiple warehouse locations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: **Lot and serial tracking**, **Multiple warehouses**, or **Multiple warehouse locations**. In this window, you can create and view kit assembly documents. You can select the operation performed on stock kits (production or disassembly), the warehouse where the operation is performed, the revision of the kit specification, and a variety of other factors. The kit assembly document includes the required stock components with their quantities and costs calculated in accordance with the kit specification revision you specify. If the specification allows component quantity variance, you can change the quantity of the component in the specified range. If the revision allows addition of components, you can add components to record all stock items included and relevant costs incurred in the process of kit production or disassembly. Also, for kits that as stock items require assigning lot or serial numbers, you can provide this information by using the **Allocations** tab. For more information about processing kits, see: [About accounting for kits](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits/). For additional details about inventory transactions, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you select an existing document that records kit production or disassembly, or you provide summary information for a new document.
Button Description
Release Releases the kit assembly document, updates the availability data for items that are kits or kit components, and generates a batch of transactions to update the general ledger.
Review batch Navigates to the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, to let you view the details of the batch.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following reports related to kit assembly:

Assembly picklist
Navigates to the Assembly picklist (IN30701S) window, to let you view the details of the picklist report.
Assembly confirmation
Navigates to the Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) window, to let you view the details of the confirmation report.
Element Description
Type

The type of operation to be performed for this kit. You can select one of the following options:

Production
The document records kit assembly or production.
Disassembly
The document records kit disassembly.
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the kit assembly document. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft, can be edited manually, and cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document is ready to be released. A document with the Balanced status can be modified or deleted.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. Documents with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold

This check box indicates (if selected) that the kit assembly document has the status On hold.

Clear the check box to change the status to Balanced.

Date

The date when the kit assembly document was created.

All transactions based on this document will have this transaction date.

Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the document should be posted.
Item ID

The identifier of the kit as an stock item.

When you are selecting an existing kit for viewing or modification, you can select from only the items marked as kits on the General settings tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Revision The revision of the kit specification used for the kit assembling or disassembling.
Reason code

The reason code used for the kit disassembling operation.

(This field is not available for the operations of the Production type.)

Description A brief description of the kit assembly document.
Created from If a kit assembly document has been created from a sales order line, this field displays a link to the sales document and the sales order line.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the assembly or disassembly is performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location where the assembly or disassembly is performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

UoM The unit of measure used for the kit.
Quantity The quantity of the kits assembled or disassembled.
## The Stock components tab On this tab, you can view all the components required to assemble the specified number of kits, or all the components that will become available after disassembly of the specified number of kits. Components are listed in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification, as defined on the **Stock components** tab of the [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) window. If the **Allow component addition** check box is selected for the revision, you can add components. Also, for components for which lot or serial numbers are traced, you can provide such information.
Element Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, so you can specify how the quantity of this specific component is split between sub items, locations, lot/serial numbers, and expiration dates for the component. This button is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Multiple warehouse locations, Inventory sub items, or Lot serial tracking.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of this kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
Location

The warehouse location where the component is stored.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

UoM The unit of measure of this stock item added as a component of the kit.
Quantity

The actual quantity of this stock item added as a kit component.

For the Production type of operation, you can change the quantities of the component only if quantity variance is allowed for it in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window, which is determined by the Allow component qty. variance check box.

For the Disassembly type of operation, the quantity of the component is not validated.

Unit cost The cost of the base unit of this stock item serving as a component of the kit.
Reason code

(Only available only for operations of the Disassembly type.)

The reason code used to record costs for the kit disassembling operation.

Component qty. A read-only column that shows the quantity of this stock item added as a kit component, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
UoM A read-only column displaying the unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item added as a kit component, as defined by the kit specification.
Disassembly coeff.

The coefficient indicating, for kit disassembly, to what extent the component can be returned to the inventory. This coefficient is a decimal value between 0 and 1.

If the kit can be totally disassembled back to its components, the coefficient for every component is 1. If this component is included in a part of the kit that can not be disassembled completely, the value is less than 1.

Allow component qty. variance

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

This check box (if selected) indicates that the component quantity may be increased or decreased. You can change the quantity to 0 on kit assembly lines created from the Sales orders (SO301000) window when this option is set to true.

This read-only column was set in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

Min. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

Read only. This column displays the minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit, as defined by the kit specification.

Max. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

Read only. This column displays the maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit, as defined by the kit specification.

Allow component substitution This check box (if selected) indicates that the components can be substituted by another stock item. This read-only column was set in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item on the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Generate (button)

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Quantity

The quantity of the stock item with the same subitem code and the same lot number.

It is 1 for items with serial numbers.

UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
## The Non-stock components tab This tab displays the components that define additional costs for the kit to be assembled or disassembled, in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification. You can add components only if component addition is allowed for this kit revision.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item of this kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure of this non-stock item added as a component of the kit.
Quantity

The actual quantity of the non-stock item as a kit component.

For operations of the Production type, you can change the quantities of the component only if quantity variance is allowed for it in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

For operations of the Disassembly type, the quantity of the component is not validated.

Unit cost The cost of this non-stock item serving as a component of the kit.
Reason code

(Only available for operations of the Disassembly type.)

The reason code used to record costs for the kit disassembling operation.

Component qty. A read-only column that shows the quantity of this non-stock item added as a kit component, as defined by the kit specification in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
UoM A read-only column showing the unit of measure used for the non-stock item added as a kit component, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Allow component qty. variance

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

A check box that indicates whether the component quantity actually used in kit may differ from the quantity specified in the specification revision. This read-only value was specified in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

Min. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

A read-only column displaying the minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the inventory kit, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

Max. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operation.)

A read-only column that shows the maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the inventory kit, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

## The Allocations tab On this tab, you specify how the total quantity of kits produced or disassembled (according to this document) is split by lot or serial number, or expiration date. For new kits, this information is specified only if these numbers are to be assigned on production.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item (kit) that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number for these kits.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Generate

A button that, if clicked, initiates generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Location

The location where the specific quantity of kits is stored.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number assigned to the specific quantity.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

UoM The unit of measure used for the kits as the base unit.
Quantity The quantity of the kits with specific property: subitem, lot or serial number, or location.
Expiration date

The expiration date for the specific quantity of kits.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

## The Financial details tab On this tab, you specify how the total quantity of kits produced or disassembled (according to this document) is split by lot or serial number, or expiration date. For new kits, this information is specified only if these numbers are to be assigned on production.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the kit assembly document. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, and you can view the transactions’ details.
Branch The branch for which the kits have been assembled.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Kit specifications (IN209500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500 page You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Kit specifications (IN209500) You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. To define the cost of assembling the kits, you can add non-stock components of the **labour** type. You can create a kit specification only for a stock item marked as a kit on the **General settings** tab of the[Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Any modification of a kit specification is saved as a revision, and revisions are stored in case a kit requires disassembly. ## The top part By using this area, you can create a new revision of a kit specification; you can also select any kit specification by its ID and view its revisions or add a new revision. You cannot modify an existing revision; you only can create a new one.
Element Description
Kit item ID The item ID of the kit, as assigned to the kit in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Non-stock Read only. This check box indicates (if selected) that this is a non-stock kit.
Revision The unique identifier of the kit specification revision.
Description

A brief description of the kit specification.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Active If you select this check box, this kit specification is active.
Allow component addition If you select this check box, it is permitted to add unlisted components to this kit on its assembly or shipping.
Total cost The total cost of all components combined.
## The Stock components tab On this tab, you can view all the components required to assemble the specified number of kits, or all the components that will become available after disassembly of the specified number of kits. Components are listed in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification, as defined on the **Stock components** tab of the Kit specifications window. If the **Allow component addition** check box is selected for the revision, you can add components. Also, you can provide such information for components for which lot or serial numbers are traced..
Column Description
Component ID

The ID of the kit component.

Note

For non-stock kits, only stock components may be added.

Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item added as the component to the kit.
Component qty. The quantity of the item added as a component to the kit.
Allow component qty. variance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the component quantity of items may be increased or decreased.
Min. component qty. The minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Max. component qty. The maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Disassembly coeff.

The coefficient indicating, for kit disassembly, to what extent the component can be returned to the inventory. This coefficient is a decimal value between 0 and 1.

If the kit can be totally disassembled back to its components, the coefficient for every component is 1. If this component is included in a part of the kit that can not be disassembled completely, the value is less than 1.

Allow component substitution A check box that indicates (if selected) that a substitution can be made for this component in the kit.
Unit cost The cost of a single piece.
Cost The sum of unit cost multiplied by quantity.
## The Non-stock components tab On this tab, you can view a table showing the non-stock items included as components in the kit specification. Generally, non-stock items added as components represent the overhead costs of kit assembly, such as labour and other manufacturing costs.
Element Description
Component ID The ID of a non-stock item added as the kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item added as the component to the kit
Component qty. The quantity of the item added as the component to the kit.
Allow component qty. variance This check box indicates (if selected) that the component quantity may be increased or decreased.
Min. component qty. The minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Max. component qty. The maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Unit cost The cost of a single piece.
Cost The sum of unit cost multiplied by quantity.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Lot/serial classes (IN207000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000 page You can use this window to define the lot/serial classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Lot/serial classes (IN207000) You can use this window to define the lot/serial classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only displayed if the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). > [!NOTE] > If this functionality is not enabled, the **DEFAULT** lot and serial class is automatically assigned to all item classes and individual stock items. A lot/serial class is used to group stock items with lot or serial numbers and to provide default settings for new items of the class. In this window, you can browse through the existing lot/serial classes and modify their properties, add new classes, and delete unused unpopulated classes from the system. For details on configuring lot and serial numbers, see: [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/). For information about using these numbers, see: [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter basic information about a new lot/serial class and view information about an existing class.
Element Description
Class ID The unique ID of the lot/serial class. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the lot/serial class.
Tracking method

The tracking method for the inventory lot/serial class. Select one of the following options:

Not tracked
No tracking of the lot numbers or serial numbers for items of the class will be performed.
Track lot numbers
Tracking of the lot numbers for items of the inventory lot/serial class will be performed.
Track serial numbers
Tracking of the serial numbers for items of the inventory lot/serial class will be performed.
Track expiration date

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will track the expiration date for stock items of this lot/serial class.

This option is not used for classes with Not tracked selected as their tracking method.

Required for drop-ship This check box indicates (if selected) that the stock items of this lot/serial class are required for drop-ship.
Assignment method

The method of assigning lot or serial numbers to the items. Select one of the following options:

When received
Assigns these numbers to the items when the items are received
When used
Assigns these numbers to the items when the items are used
Issue method

The method used to issue the items of this lot/serial class, which is not applicable for items of the class for which the Not tracked tracking method is selected. You can select one of the following issue methods:

FIFO
A first-in-first-out (FIFO) issue method
LIFO
A last-in-first-out (LIFO) issue method
Sequential
A sequential issue method
Expiration
An issue method based on the expiration date; to use this method, select the Track expiration date check box for this class
User defined
A custom, user-defined issue method
Share the auto-increment value between all class items

This check box lets you use (if selected) the same auto-increment value for all stock items in the lot/serial class.

If it is cleared, for each item, an individual auto-increment value may be set in the Stock items (IN202500) window; if such a number is not set, the initial value for each item will be 0000 by default.

Automatic incremental value

For a newly created class, the initial value to be used for generating new values (incremented by 1) in the lot/serial number segment that has the Automatic incremental value option selected in the Type column on this window. The value will change as follows:

  • If the Share the auto-increment value between all class items option is selected, the value will be incremented each time a new lot of any item of the class is received.

  • If this option is not selected for the class, the box will be blank. For different items of the class, individual auto-increment values will be used as follows:

    • If for an item of the class, the initial auto-increment value is specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window, that value will be used for the lot segment.
    • If for an item of the class the initial auto-increment value is not specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window, the default value 0000 will be used as the initial auto-increment value.
Automatically generate next number

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will automatically generate the next number for items of the class with an auto-increment segment.

If the check box is not selected, users should manually enter serial numbers.

Max. auto-generate number

The maximum number of serial numbers that can be generated at once for items of this lot/serial class.

If a larger quantity of the item is specified on a document, you will get an error message telling you that you have more than enough quantity, and because of that there will be unassigned numbers. You need to enter a new line for the exceeding quantity.

You can initiate assignment of serial numbers for unassigned quantity of the item manually.

## The Numbering settings table You can specify the structure of the lot/serial numbers in this table. Each row describes a segment of the lot/serial numbers to be used for items of the class.
Column Description
Segment number The segment number of a lot or serial number, which is assigned automatically by the system.
Type

The type of segment value to be used for this segment. You can use one of the following options:

Automatic incremental value
Generates incremented values for the segment using as the initial value either the Auto-incremental value for this class or the value specific to the stock item if the Share the auto-increment value between all class items check box is not selected. This option can be selected for only one of the segments.
Constant
Uses a constant in the number segment.
Day
Uses the day (from the date when the lot or serial number is generated) in the segment.
Month
Uses the two-digit month (from the date when the lot or serial number is generated) in the segment.
Month long
Uses the month name in the lot/serial number segment.
Year
Uses the two-digit year in the lot/serial number segment.
Year long
Uses the four-digit year in the lot/serial number segment.
Custom date format
Uses the date in the custom date format in the segment.
Value

The specific value to be used in the lot/serial number segment. Enter the value in this column taking into account the type of the value:

  • For the Constant type, specify a constant to be used as the segment value.
  • For the Custom date format type, specify a date format ( yyMM, ddMM, or yyyy-MM-dd ) to be used in the segment.

Values are not required for other types of segments.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Movement classes (IN208600) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600 page You use this window to define, view, or modify movement classes, which are used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Movement classes (IN208600) You use this window to define, view, or modify movement classes, which are used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The system assigns movement classes to stock items based on the turnover rates of the items, use the [Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) window to make mass changes to movement classes of items. For details on using movement classes, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) and [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The table
Column Description
Movement class ID A one-letter ID of the movement class.
Description A brief description of this movement class.
Counts per year The number of stocktaking counts per year to be performed for items assigned to this movement class.
Max. turnover %

A threshold value (%) of the criteria to be used for assigning the stock items (in the specific warehouse in a specific turnover period) to this movement class.

For details of the assignment method, see: About inventory ranking methods

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Non-stock items (IN202000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-stock items (IN202000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Non-stock items are not kept in a warehouse, so they are immediately available for purchase when they are ordered. For details on these items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the selected non-stock item
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected non-stock item
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected non-stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected non-stock item.
## The top part In this area, you can select an item by its ID to view its information, or you can create a record for a new non-stock item.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the non-stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

At a later time, you can change the non-stock item ID by selecting Change ID on the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Item status

The status of the non-stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the non-stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion. No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the non-stock item.
Work group The work group that is responsible for the non-stock item.
Product manager The product manager who is responsible for the non-stock item.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can define or change the default settings for a non-stock item. You can also specify its unit conversion rules. ### The Item defaults section By using the elements in the section, you can assign this item to an item class, a posting class, and a price class, and you can specify other default properties.
Element Description
Item class

The item class the item is associated with; only item classes for non-stock items appear on the list for selection.

Item classes, which are used to group stock items and provide default settings for new items of the class, are defined in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Type

The non-stock item type. You can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock items
Labour
A type of non-stock items to be used as labour hour rates.
Service
A type of non-stock items to be used as service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used as charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses
Posting class

The posting class the item is associated with.

You can use posting classes to group non-stock items with similar properties and provide default settings used to post inventory transactions related to the items to the general ledger. The posting classes are defined in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

Is a kit

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a kit.

The components of the kit can be specified by using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for an item, you will be notified regarding changes.

The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the item.

VAT category The VAT category of the non-stock item. By default, this is the VAT category specified for the item class to which this item has been assigned. If needed, another VAT category can be selected for the item.
Default warehouse

The warehouse whose settings can be used for this non-stock item on sales orders or purchase orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Require receipt

A check box that you select to require that the system create a purchase receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, the system will not generate any inventory transactions for the non-stock item.

Require shipment

A check box you select to require that the system create a sales order receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, you cannot have the system generate any inventory transactions for this non-stock item.

Complete purchase order line

Choose between:

  • By amount
  • By quantity
Reverse charge item

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a reverse charge item.

Note

This check box is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

External ID

This field is automatically populated if the non-stock item is linked to an external expense type in the Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

### The Unit conversion section By using the unit conversion table, you can set up conversion rules between different units of measure used for this item. The unit conversion parameters are specified with respect to the UoM selected as the base unit for the non-stock item. This table is only available if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.

Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you can select the base unit of measure (UoM) for the non-stock item. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can also specify the UoMs to be used as sales and purchase units for the non-stock item, and the conversion rules for these units and other UoMs that can apply to the item (available from the item class). You can select UoMs from the list of UoMs available for the item class or type new UoMs.
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view and set the default price and the pending standard cost for the non-stock item in the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. ### The Price management section Here you can specify settings related to the management of prices.
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the non-stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the non-stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission should be calculated on the sale of this non-stock item.

The check box is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for this non-stock item.
Mark-up (%) The mark-up percentage to be used for setting the price for the item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of this non-stock item.
Default price

The price of the non-stock item.

This price is used as the default price if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Supplier ledger workspace.

### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost

The standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated.

You can type the cost directly into the field.

Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost becomes effective.

You can select the date for a pending cost.

Current cost The current standard cost of the non-stock item.
Effective date The date when the current standard cost became effective.
Last cost The standard cost assigned to the non-stock item before the current standard cost was set.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT or RUT deductible item Select this check box if the item should be used for ROT or RUT deduction.
ROT Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Supplier details tab This tab contains information about the supplier from which the item is purchased and the supplier's prices for the item.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default

This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item.

Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item.

When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.

Supplier no. The ID of the supplier. Supplier settings are specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase unit

The unit of measure in which the item is purchased.

This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.

Supplier item ID The item ID used by the supplier for this item.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the item.

## The Cross-reference tab You use the **Cross-reference** tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the non-stock item used in your company and the identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternate codification used for the item, You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
You use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
You use this type to specify (or enter it by using a barcode scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this non-stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the non-stock item as used by the supplier or customer.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
## The Packaging tab This tab contains information about the measurements of the item.
Element Description
Weight The weight of the item.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight of the item.
Volume The volume of the item.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the item volume.
## The Deferral settings tab You use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for this non-stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed, and the revenue or expense will be recognised immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sales will be recognised according to the deferral code. If this non-stock item is a package, also referred to as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table.
Element Description
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to this non-stock item.

The code specifies how the revenue from the sale of this item will be recognised. The deferral codes are defined in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window.

Default term

The date range defined for deferred revenue recognition (for example, 2 years for a two-year customer support subscription that you sell).

The field is available for editing only if the Flexible by period, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is selected for the deferral code selected in the Deferral code field.

The maximum value is 10000. Possible time units are year(s), month(s), week(s), and day(s).

Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccount is used to account for deferred revenue.
Total percentage

The total percentage of the item price as split among components.

This value is calculated automatically as the sum of the percentages assigned to the components if the item is sold as a package and consists of components.

When the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.

### The Revenue components table In this table, you can add detailed information about the item's components to be used for deferrals. Each component can be assigned a specific deferral code and a percentage or fixed amount of the item price that will be used for deferrals when the item is sold.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component of this non-stock item, which is sold as a package.
Sales account The sales account used for this component.
Sales sub. The sales subaccount used for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for this component of the non-stock item.
Deferral code The deferral code that has been specified for this component.
Default term

The date range defined for the process of the deferred revenue or expense recognition (for example, 6 months for a six-month support license).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days, or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.

Default term UOM

The unit of measure for the default term: year(s), month(s), week(s), or day(s).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.

Allocation method

The method used to allocate the document amount between the components. The following options are available:

Percentage
The component price will be computed as the percentage of the total package price. If you select this option, the Percentage column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the percentage defined for this component.
Fixed amount
The component price will be defined as a fixed price. If you select this option, the Fixed amount column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the amount defined for this component.
Residual
This method applies to the non-deferral components. The price for such a component will be defined as the amount that will remain after the system deducts the deferred revenues of the other components from the total package amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Allocation method column.
Percentage The percentage of the item price for this component if the Percentage option is selected in the Allocation method column.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab contains information about the default general ledger accounts used to post transactions related to this non-stock item. The specified accounts and subaccounts are mostly used as the sources of options for the posting settings of the item defined by its posting class.
Element Description
Expense accrual account

For a non-stock item, that is a component of a stock kit, this account (of the Expense or Liability type) will be used to accrue the costs (standard costs) of non-stock components in the process of kit assembly, if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the General ledger accounts tab in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

For a Labour type item, the expense accrual account is used to accrue the cost of labour on projects (the account is credited on release of time cards). The account will be used for time card related transactions if Labour item accrual is selected as the Expense accrual account source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Expense accrual sub.

The subaccount to be used as the default expense accrual subaccount for this non-stock item.

For kit assembly related transactions, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the posting class (the Combine inventory / accrual sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

For transactions with labour items, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the Expense accrual sub. source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Reason code sub The subaccount of the reason code for the item.
Expense account The default expense account to be used for this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this account will be used for transactions with this item as the default expense account if Item is selected in the Use COGS / expense account from field for the posting class of the item.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense payroll taxable account

The expense payroll taxable account to be used for this non-stock item.

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled and the non-stock item is of type Expense.

Expense sub. The subaccount to be used by default with the expense account for transactions related to this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default expense subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine COGS / expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used for this non-stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.

Purchase accrual sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class for this item (the Posting classes (IN206000) window), this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.

Sales account The account to be used as the sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - non-taxable account The account to be used as the non-taxable sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - EU account The account to be used as the EU sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - export account The account to be used as the export sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used by default for transactions recording a sale of this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default sales subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine sales sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase price variance account

The account (of the Expense type) to be used as the default purchase price variance account to record purchases of this non-stock item on receipts if Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field for the posting class of the item.

The purchase price account is used to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice (if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method).

Purchase price variance sub.

The corresponding subaccount.

This subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default purchase price variance subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine purchase price variance sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferred amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
## The Attributes tab You can use the **Attributes** tab to associate attributes with the non-stock item. You can select each attribute from the list of attributes defined in the system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. ### The Attributes section
Column Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute.
### The Sales categories section By using this table, you can select the values of the sales categories for the non-stock item. To define the sales categories or view their details, use the [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) window.
Column Description
Category The sales category identifier.
### The Image upload section
Element Description
Browse Click the button to locate the image you want to upload.
Upload Click the button to upload selected image.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that includes tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for an item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Posting classes (IN206000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000 page You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Posting classes (IN206000) You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. A posting class is a group of settings that provide the default values for the purchase, sales, and inventory transactions with the item and define how these transaction will be posted to the general ledger. By using this window, you can browse through the existing posting classes and modify their properties, add new posting classes, and delete obsolete classes from the system. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the identifier and description of a new posting class, or select an existing class to view or modify its details.
Element Description
Class ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of the posting class. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the posting class.
## The Posting settings tab On this tab, you can specify which accounts and subaccounts will be used when inventory or other transactions related to items of the class are posted to the general ledger. For most subaccounts on this tab, you can specify the rule of choosing segment values to be used when the item-related transactions are posted to the general ledger. To set up the rule for a specific subaccount, for each segment in the subaccount, press **F3** and choose a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options: + **I** The subaccount associated with the stock item or non-stock item. Subaccounts for stock items are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and for non-stock items on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **W** The subaccount associated with the warehouse. Subaccounts for warehouses are specified using the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This field is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. + **P** The subaccount associated with the posting class. Subaccounts for posting classes are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of this window. + **V** The subaccount associated with the supplier. Subaccounts for suppliers are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This option is only available for the **Combine purchase accrual sub. from** field. For a segment, the character designating the option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Element Description
Use inventory/accrual account from

The source of the inventory account (of the Asset type) for stock items or expense accrual account for non-stock items or labour items (of the Asset or Liability type) to be used for transactions that involve items assigned to this posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
Uses the inventory account associated with the stock item or the expense accrual account associated with the non-stock item. The inventory account for stock items is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window. The expense accrual account for non-stock items is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
Applicable to stock items only. Uses the inventory account associated with the warehouse. This inventory account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
Uses the inventory/accrual account associated with the posting class. The inventory/accrual account associated with the posting class is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine inventory/accrual sub. from

A rule that defines from where each inventory subaccount segment value, or expense accrual subaccount segment value, is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the inventory account, or expense accrual account, for transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.

Use sales account from
Note

for the Sales orders (SO301000) window, the sales account is retrieved according to the Use sales account from setting in the Order types (SO201000) window. See also: About suggested sales accounts.

The source of the sales account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the sales account associated with the item. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
To use the sales account associated with the warehouse. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the sales account associated with the posting class. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine sales sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the sales account is composed for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Use COGS/expense account from

The source of the COGS (for stock items) or expense (for non-stock items) account to be used for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Copy COGS sub. from sales This check box indicates that the system will copy the COGS or expense subaccount from the sales subaccount. When this option is selected, you cannot define the rule to combine COGS subaccount from the related subaccounts.
Combine COGS/expense sub. from

A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the COGS (for stock items) or expense (for non-stock items) account is composed for transactions that involve items of the posting class.

Note

Combine COGS/expense sub. from is only enabled if the Copy COGS sub. from sales check box is not selected.

The sources of the segment values are Warehouse, Posting class, and Item.

Use standard cost variance account from

The source of the standard cost variance account to be used for the inventory transactions with items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine standard cost variance sub. from

A rule that defines from where each standard cost variance subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the standard cost variance account for the inventory transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.

Use standard cost revaluation account from

The source of the standard cost revaluation account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine standard cost revaluation sub. from

A rule that defines from where each standard cost revaluation subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the standard cost revaluation account for the inventory transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.

Use purchase accrual account from

The source of the purchase accrual account to be used for the purchase receipts and inventory transactions with items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

  • Item To use the purchase accrual account specified for the stock item or non-stock item (that requires a purchase receipt) on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Warehouse To use the purchase accrual account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Posting class To use the purchase accrual account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.

  • Supplier To use the purchase accrual account specified for the supplier on the General ledger accounts tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

Combine purchase accrual sub. from

A rule that defines from where each purchase accrual subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the purchase accrual account for purchase receipts and inventory transactions that involve stock items and non-stock items (that require a purchase receipt) of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, Supplier, and Warehouse.

Use purchase price variance account from

The source of purchase price variance account to be used for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine purchase price variance sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the purchase price variance account is composed for the inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Use landed cost variance account from

The source of landed cost variance account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine landed cost variance sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the landed cost variance account is composed for the inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Stocktaking reason code For stock items only. The reason code to be used by default for stocktaking involving items associated with this posting class.
## The General ledger accounts tab On the **General ledger accounts** tab, you can specify general ledger accounts and subaccounts associated with the posting class itself to be used as one of the options for combining subaccounts and specifying accounts for the posting class.
Element Description
Inventory/accrual account The asset account to be used as the inventory account for stock items of this posting class, or the asset or liability account to be used as the expense accrual account for non-stock items or labour items of this posting class, if the option Posting class is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the Posting settings tab in this window.
Inventory/accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the Posting settings tab in this window for this posting class, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account, or the expense accrual subaccount to be used with the expense accrual account.
Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used with the reason code for items of the posting class.
Sales account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for non-taxable income.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for income from the EU.
Sales - export account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for income from export.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used with the sales account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost variance account The expense account to be used with the standard cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with standard cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost revaluation account The expense account to be used as the standard cost revaluation account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used with standard cost revaluation account associated with the posting class.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items associated with this posting class, if the option Posting class is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the Posting settings tab in this window.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the Posting settings tab in this window for this posting class, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account The expense account to be used as the purchase price variance account associated with the posting class.
Purchase price variance sub. The purchase price variance subaccount to be used for the default posting class.
COGS/expense account If this posting class will be used for stock items, this is the expense account to be used as the cost of goods sold (COGS) account associated with the posting class. If this class will be used for non-stock items or labour items, this is the expense account associated with the posting class.
Expense acct, non-taxable The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for non-taxable expenses.
Expense EU account The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for EU-related expenses.
Expense account, import The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for import-related expenses.
Expense payroll taxable account

The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for payroll taxable expenses.

Note

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled.

COGS/expense sub. The subaccount to be used with the COGS or expense account associated with the posting class.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used as the landed cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the landed cost variance account as associated with the posting class.
Deferral account The general ledger account to hold the deferred revenue (liability account) or expense (asset account) amount.
Deferral sub. The subaccount (if applicable in your system), for proper tracking of deferral transactions.
### The Excise duty section This section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The priority order in which the accounts in this section are used is: 1. from the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and if empty, 1. from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. For information about the generated General ledger batch, see [About excise duties](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/about-excise-duties/).
Element Description
Sales account The income account that is connected to the VAT payable account (it has a set VAT category). The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Sales sub The subaccount to be used with the sales account.
Sales offset account The income account that is not connected to the VAT payable account (it does not have a set VAT category), used to balance the sales account. The excise duty amounts are recorded in debit.
Sales offset sub The subaccount to be used with the sales offset account.
Payable account The liability account that accumulates the excise duty amounts to be paid to a tax agency for the excise duty reporting period. The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Payable sub The corresponding payable subaccount.
### The Expense accounts section
Element Description
Use Expense accounts If this check box is selected and when a purchase invoice is released, the following transactions will be added to journal transactions.
Purchase P&L (debit) Select an account here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Purchase P&L sub. Select a subaccount here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L (credit) Select an account for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L sub. Select a subaccount for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Purchase EU Select an account here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase EU sub. Select a subaccount here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import Select an account for a non-EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import sub. Select a subaccount for a non-EU supplier in P/L account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Prepare replenishment (IN508000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000 page Use this window to prepare replenishment requests for the stock items whose stock at a specific warehouse needs to be replenished in accordance with the automated replenishment settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare replenishment (IN508000) Use this window to prepare replenishment requests for the stock items whose stock at a specific warehouse needs to be replenished in accordance with the automated replenishment settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The settings provided on the **Replenishment info** tab in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window define whether stock replenishment for the item is needed and in what quantities. If for some items replenishment is to be performed from the source warehouse, as the result of this processing, the requests for the appropriate quantities of the items (required for replenishment) will become visible in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window so that transfer orders can be generated. For the prepared replenishment requests, you can create purchase orders in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window and transfer orders by using the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View supplier inventory Navigates to the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window so you can view supplier-specific details for the stock item if purchased from the supplier specified in the Preferred supplier column.
Process Processes the items that have been selected by using the check boxes in the unlabelled column of the table.
Process all Processes all the items listed in the table.
## The top part In this part, you specify criteria the system uses to select items to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse (This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the stock should be replenished. If the Warehouses functionality is disabled, the MAIN warehouse is assumed.
Purchase date The date when the purchase will be made to replenish the stock.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use to select the items to be displayed based on the product manager to whom the items are assigned for management:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another product manager to view the items assigned to the manager.
  • Clear the check box and leave the field blank to view items assigned to all product managers of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you can use to select the items to be displayed based on the product work group the items are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your product work group or to the selected product manager in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another product work group to display the items assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all product work groups.
Only suggested items A check box you select to display only the items that require replenishment.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased.
Item Class ID The item class of the items to be purchased. You can leave the box blank to view the items of all item classes requiring replenishment.
Item ID The item ID of the particular item to be purchased for stock replenishment. You can leave the field blank to view various items requiring replenishment.
Description The description of the item to be purchased for stock replenishment.
## The table This table contains the list of stock items to be purchased for stock replenishment. By using the elements in the Selection area (the upper part of the window) you can specify the criteria for selecting the items to be displayed in the table.
Column Description
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the stock will be replenished.
Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is required.
Description The description of the item for which stock replenishment is required.
Suggested qty. The quantity to be replenished. By default, it is the value calculated based on replenishment parameters specified for the item in the particular warehouse minus the quantity on supply. The value can be manually adjusted.
Internal replenishment The quantity (on internal replenishment requests) to be ordered to replenish the stock.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of the stock item at this warehouse.
Qty. not available The quantity that is not available.
Incoming The quantity of items included in the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and inventory transfer documents that have not yet been released. This quantity is deducted from the planned replenishment quantity if the Minimum/maximum. replenishment method is used for this item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Outgoing The quantity on shipments and sales orders calculated according to the availability settings of the item class.
Qty. on hard demand The quantity on shipments and sales orders calculated as hard demand, that is, (Qty. sales order shipping) + (Qty sales order back-ordered) + (Qty sales order shipped).
Qty. available The available quantity.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the stock item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Reorder point The stock level that, when it has been reached, prompts the system to replenish the stock of the item. The quantity is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity allowed at the warehouse.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Source warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.
Default supplier The preferred supplier from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can choose another supplier if necessary.
Default location (This column only appears if the Account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The supplier’s location from which the item can be purchased. You can choose a non-default location if necessary.
Default supplier name The name of the selected supplier.
Item class The item class to which the item was assigned.
Supplier class The class of the supplier indicated in the Preferred supplier column.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000 page By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. You can select the stocktaking type, the warehouse (if it is not defined by the type), and particular warehouse locations. The method of generating the list of items to be counted is defined by the stocktaking type. Generating a stocktaking document starts a new stocktaking process and "freezes" all operations with the stock items in the specified warehouse until the stocktaking count is completed or until all the count data is entered, depending on whether the **Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state** check box is selected for the warehouse in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. If the selected stocktaking type is based on the **Full stocktaking** generation method and no particular location is selected on the **Location selection** tab of this window, the whole warehouse will be in the frozen state; if specific locations are selected, only those locations will be in the frozen state. > [!NOTE] > If the selected stocktaking type is based on the **Full stocktaking** generation method, the whole warehouse or the selected locations will freeze, regardless if you select items in the list. ## The top part
Button Description
Generate stocktaking

Generates the stocktaking document only for the items you have selected by using the check boxes in the table. You can also select all items in a page by selecting the unlabelled check box in the table column, next to the Item ID column.

When the generation is done, you will be redirected to the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window, where you continue the stocktaking process.

Generate stocktaking all

Generates the stocktaking document for all items shown in the table. Any selections you may have done in the table will be overridden when you click this button.

When the generation is done, you will be redirected to the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window, where you continue the stocktaking process.

## The Warehouse/inventory selection tab On this tab, you can select the type of stocktaking count and specify additional options for generating count sheets, if needed.
Element Description
Type ID The type of stocktaking count to be used to generate the stocktaking sheets.
Description The description of the type.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the stocktaking should be prepared. By default, it is the warehouse defined by the stocktaking type. If no warehouse is specified by the type, you can select a warehouse for stocktaking.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is selected by default.

Generation method The generation method to be used to select stock items for counting. By default, the generation method is associated with the stocktaking type.
Blank lines to add The number of lines to be added to the end of the list. These lines can be used to record additional information.
Include items with zero stock balance When this is selected, the items listed in this window will include items with zero stock balance and the last previous warehouse.
Starting date to include from The date selector filters the items with zero stock balance by date. For example, if you set the date to 01/01/2024, the list will only include items and locations in stock between 01/01/2024 and the current date.
## The Location selection tab On the tab, you can select the warehouse locations from which items will be included into the list for the stocktaking count. > [!NOTE] > This column is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Location The warehouse location where the stocktaking will be performed. The structure of the warehouse is defined in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Description The description of the warehouse location.
Pick priority The pick priority specified for this location.
## The table
Column Description
Line number The line number in the stocktaking document.
Tag number

The tag number to be used for counting items with the properties specified on this line: item ID, sub item code, lot/serial number, and location.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Use tags option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window is selected.

Item ID The identifier of the item.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Expiration date

The expiration date for the specified quantity of the item with the specified lot number, if applicable.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Book qty. The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Base unit The base unit of the item.
Description The description of the item.
Item class ID The item class to which the item belongs.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Reason codes (CS211000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000 page In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reason codes (CS211000) In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. A reason code is used to provide a reason for the transaction, as well as to set an offset account and a subaccount to be used for the General ledger transaction. It can be used with direct inventory transactions to provide this information. For each reason code, you specify which inventory transaction it should be used with. Based on this, the reason code can then be selected for the specific type of transaction. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window fields These fields can be used to define a new code or to edit an existing code.
Field Description
Reason code The ID of the reason code. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description A description of the reason code.
Usage

An option indicating where this code can be used.

The following options are available:

  • Sales This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The Combine sub. from, Account and Subaccount fields are disabled for this option.
  • Credit write-off This code is used in the Customer ledger workspace. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
  • Balance write-off This code is used in the Customer ledger workspace. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
  • Supplier write-off This code is used in the Supplier ledger for automatic write-offs of small remaining balances.

The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.

Issue
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for issue documents. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
Receipt
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for receipts. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on receipts may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Adjustment
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for adjustments. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on adjustments may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Transfer
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for inventory transfers. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on transfers may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Disassembly
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used in accounting for kits. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on disassembly may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Combine sub. from

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.

The adjustable subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing a default subaccount for specific types of documents on data entry forms.

For each segment, point to a segment and press F3 to open the list of options. The available mask options depend on the Usage field value:

  • Credit write-off, Supplier write-off, and Balance write-off:

    • R - From a subaccount associated with the reason code
    • L - From a subaccount associated with the customer location This field is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
    • C - From a subaccount associated with the branch summary
    • S - From a subaccount associated with the salesperson
  • Issue, Receipt, Adjustment, Transfer, and Disassembly:

    • R - From a subaccount associated with the reason code
    • I - From a subaccount associated with the stocky item
    • P - From a subaccount associated with the posting class
    • W - From a subaccount associated with the warehouse This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Note

The letter designating the option will be repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.

Account

The general ledger account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code. Cash accounts cannot be used for any of the write-off types in the Usage field.

For issues, this account will override the COGS account.

Note

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.

Subaccount

The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code.

This account is used for reason codes to be used in inventory.

Note

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.

Sales account The sales account to be updated by the transaction amount. The field is available for reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage options.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code. The field is available for reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage options.
Parent topic: [Inventory windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Receipts (IN301000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit receipts, which you can save with the On hold or Balanced status and release. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Receipts (IN301000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit receipts, which you can save with the On hold or Balanced status and release. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The processing of receipts depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. By default, receipts are saved with the **On hold** status if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected. Receipt totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected. When a receipt is released, its transactions will be posted to the General ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. For more information about receipts, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates document release, which changes the status of the receipt to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports related to receipts:

## The top part In the top part, you can select an existing receipt by its reference number or specify summary information about a new receipt.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the receipt, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence selected for receipts in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the receipt. The following options are available:

On hold
The receipt is a draft and can be edited. Receipts with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
The receipt data has been validated by the system and the receipt can be released. It also can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the receipt is balanced.
Released
The receipt has been released and cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that you select to give the receipt the On hold status. Clear the check box to save the receipt with the Balanced status.
Date The date when the receipt was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions recorded in the document should be posted.
Transfer no. The transfer number for the receipt operation. (Enter this number only if the two-step transfer operation is performed.)
External ref. The external reference number of the inventory receipt (for example, the reference number used by the supplier).
Description A brief description of the receipt or its transactions.
Total qty. The total quantity of items to be received.
Control qty. The control quantity of items specified in the receipt. Control qty. is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. The user enters this value manually to confirm the total quantity of stock items received as compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document. If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
Total cost The total cost of the stock items received. The system automatically calculates this value as a sum of all extended cost values of all received stock items listed in the Transaction details tab of this window.
Control cost The total cost of the stock items to be received. Control cost is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. The user enters this value manually to confirm the total cost as calculated automatically for the document. If the Control cost and Total cost values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table with the transactions included in the receipt.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, from which you can define sub items, locations, lot or serial numbers, quantities, and expiration dates for the stock item received.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add items to the receipt.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the stock item received. Stock items are maintained in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock item is received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The warehouse location where the stock item is received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Quantity The quantity of the received stock item (in the unit of measure indicated below).
UoM The unit of measure of the received stock item.
Unit cost The cost of a unit of the received stock item.
Cost The extended cost of the received stock item. An extended cost is calculated automatically as the unit cost multiplied by the quantity (or amount) of item that was received.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the received stock item. To specify the lot or serial numbers of the received item, click the Allocations action on the table toolbar. If multiple serial or lot numbers should be specified, the column displays <SPLIT>. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the received stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Reason code The reason code for the receipt transaction.
Project The project with which this receipt line is associated, or the code indicating that this receipt line is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. This column is only displayed if the Projects workspace has been activated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this receipt is associated. This column is only displayed if the Projects workspace has been activated.
Description A brief description of the receipt transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, sub items, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item or assign sub items. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Generate

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same lot number. It is 1 for items with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for various warehouses and warehouse locations (if the **Warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system) and to add the required quantity of the item to the document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field. The dialog box has a selection area and a table with items that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
Item The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.
Barcode The bar code of the item to be listed. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Item class ID The item class of the items whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Show available items only A check box that you select if only items whose available quantities are greater than zero should be listed in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item are stocked. Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the stock item (under the specified item ID) that you want to add to the document.
Site

The warehouse where the items are stocked.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and the branch of the batch generated upon release of the receipt.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the receipt. Click on the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the details of the transactions.
Branch The branch receiving the goods.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Release inventory documents (IN501000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/release-inventory-documents-in501000 page You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status Balanced. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release inventory documents (IN501000) You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status Balanced. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status **Balanced**. When the documents are released, the corresponding transactions will be posted to the General ledger workspace if the **Automatically post on release** option is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## The top part
Button Description
Release Releases the documents whose check boxes you have selected (in the unlabelled column) in the Documents area.
Release all Releases all documents listed in the Documents area.
## The table In this area, you can view the list of inventory documents with the status **Balanced** and select the documents to be released.
Column Description
Document type

The type of inventory document. The following types are available:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Adjustment
  • Transfer
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the inventory document.
Status The current status of the inventory document.
Date The date when the inventory document was created.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions generated by the inventory document should be posted.
Total qty. The total quantity of goods from the inventory document.
Total cost The total cost of goods from the inventory document.
Total amount The total amount of goods from the inventory document.
Description The brief description provided for the inventory document.

Related pages

Tasks

Replenishment classes (IN208800) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800 page You can use this window to define new replenishment classes or to view and modify existing replenishment classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Replenishment classes (IN208800) You can use this window to define new replenishment classes or to view and modify existing replenishment classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Replenishment classes are used to define how stock items in different warehouses should be replenished. For example: Stock of a central warehouse may be replenished by purchasing, while stock of other, smaller warehouses can be replenished by transferring the items from the central one. You associate replenishment classes with warehouses in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. For details about replenishment classes, see: [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/) ## The table
Column Description
Class ID The unique ID of the replenishment class.
Description A brief description of the replenishment class.
Replenishment source

The default source used for stock replenishment. You can select one of the following options as the primary source of stock replenishment:

  • None No replenishment is required.

  • Purchase The items for stock replenishment will be purchased.

  • Manufacturing The items for stock replenishment will be manufactured.

  • Transfer The items for stock replenishment will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Drop shipment The items for stock replenishment are usually sold by drop-ship orders.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Drop shipment functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Purchase to order The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased only when a customer order has been received and in the quantity requested by the order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600 page Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. For details on how the seasonality settings are used for the configuration of replenishment, see: [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part This area contains summary information about a particular set of seasonality settings.
Element Description
Seasonality ID The unique ID of the set of seasonality settings. You can use 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the seasonality settings.
Calendar The calendar to be used for determining low seasons and for gathering sales statistics.
## The table This area has a table containing the seasons for product replenishment (usually related to lower sales), which have non-intersecting date ranges.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this low season record is active.
Season start date The start date of the season.
Season end date

The end date of the season.

CAUTION: Seasons should not intersect.

Factor

The factor (coefficient) used to reduce or increase the item replenishment quantity if replenishment is performed during the low season.

CAUTION: Do not set factor equal to zero.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Ship via codes (CS207500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500 page You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Ship via codes (CS207500) You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. A **ship via code** denotes a possible method your company uses to ship goods to customers. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use this area to define a new ship via code or to select an existing shipping service by its code to view or edit its details.
Element Description
Ship via The unique code associated with the non-integrated carrier, or the shipping option of your company. You can use up to 15 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of this shipping service or option. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
## The Details tab On this tab, you can specify whether this code stands for a common carrier or one of your company's shipping options. You can also select the general ledger accounts to be used to record the charges applied when goods are shipped under this code.
Element Description
Calendar The calendar associated with the carrier. A calendar reflects the carrier’s work hours and the days when the carrier ships the goods.
Calculation method

The method used to calculate freight charges, by using the rate breakdown specified on the Freight rates tab. The following options are available:

Per unit
The rates are specified as rates per weight unit.
Net
The rates are specified as flat rates.
Manual
The freight amount is specified manually for each sales order in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Base rate The flat-rate charge to be added to the freight amount, which is calculated as specified on the Freight rates tab.
Common carrier

A check box that indicates whether this carrier is a common carrier.

Because common carriers deliver goods from a company branch to the customer location which is the sales point, this check box controls which set of taxes applies to the invoice. If the check box is selected, the taxes associated with the address of the customer location are applied. If the check box is cleared, the taxes associated with the address of the selling branch are applied.

VAT category

The VAT category to be applied to the freight amount when goods are shipped with this code.

For details, see: About freight calculation.

Freight sales account The general ledger account of the Income type that is used to record the freight charges to be paid to the company. This account is associated with the ship via code and is used as one of the sources for the Use freight account from setting in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Freight sales sub.

The freight sales subaccount associated with the ship via code is used as one of the sources for generating the freight sales subaccount according to the rule specified in the Combine freight sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window.

This field is available if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.

Freight expense account The general ledger account of the Expense type to be used to record the freight amounts to be paid to the carrier. This account is not updated by the freight cost amounts from the sales orders shipped by the carrier. This account is updated on release of purchase orders by the amounts of the Freight -type lines with this ship via code specified in the Supplier location column.
Freight expense sub.

The freight expense subaccount associated with the ship via code.

This field is available if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.

## The Freight rates tab The tab provides information about how the rates depend on the weight (and optionally volume) of goods to be shipped by the carrier. Rate break points are indicated by shipment weight, with volume specifying an additional restriction, if needed. Rates are flat or per weight unit, depending on the **Calculation method** value on the **Details** tab. For details about the calculation of freight cost, see [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/).
Column Description
Weight The minimum weight to which the rate may be applied.
Volume The minimum volume to which the rate may be applied.
Zone ID The shipping zone to which the goods with the specified weight and volume are shipped.
Rate

The flat rate or rate per weight unit, depending on the option (Net or Per Unit) selected in the Calculation method field on the Details tab. The number of decimal places for freight rates is defined by the value in the Price/cost decimal places field in the Organisations (CS101500) window.

The freight amount is calculated as follows:

  • With the Net option selected, the freight amount equals this value for the shipment.
  • With the Per unit option selected, the freight amount equals this value multiplied by the shipment weight.
## The Packages tab The tab holds information about packages or, boxes used with this ship via code. You can define boxes in the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window. In Visma Net, you can specify carrier packaging information for all carriers. You can configure the system in such a way that the users can select boxes for shipments manually; alternatively, if the **Automatic packaging** functionality is included in your license, the system automatically suggests the optimal set of boxes for each order and then for each shipment. For more information, see [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/).
Column Description
Box ID The ID of the type of boxes used by the carrier under this ship via code.
Description A description of the type of field.
Tare weight The weight of a box of this type.
Max. weight The maximum weight of items that can fit into a box of this type.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight.
Max. volume The maximum volume a box of the type can hold.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the volume.
Length The length of a box of the type; along with width and height defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.
Width The width of a box of the type; along with length and height, it defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.
Height The height of a box of the type; along with width and length, it defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Stock items (IN202500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500 page Use this window to view or edit information about specific stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stock items (IN202500) Use this window to view or edit information about specific stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information about stock items, see: [About stock and non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Specify standard costs for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-stock-items/) + [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/) + [Configure a stock item for automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging/) + [Change a stock item's Item ID](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/change-a-stock-item-s-item-id/) + [Move items to another item class](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-items-to-another-item-class/) + [Add bar code to stock item](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/add-bar-code-to-stock-item/) + [Activate and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the current stock item.
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected stock item.
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Summary
To open the Inventory summary (IN401000) window and view summary information on the quantities of the stock item available in the system.
Allocation details
To open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window and view detailed information on how quantities of the stock item are allocated among warehouses and locations.
Transaction summary
To open the Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) window and view summary information on inventory transactions related to the stock item.
Transaction details
To open the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window and view detailed information on inventory transactions.
Transaction history
To open the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window and view detailed information on inventory transactions posted within a selected period.
Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected stock item.
## The top part In this area, you enter basic information about a new stock item. You can also select an existing stock item by its ID and view or change its details.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

You can later change the stock item ID by selecting Change item ID in the Actions menu of the toolbar.

Item status

The status of the stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion: No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the stock item.
Work group The product work group to which the stock item is assigned.
Product manager The product manager to whom this stock item is assigned for processing.
## The General information tab In this tab you can specify the general settings for the stock item and unit conversion rules for all units of measure that can be used for the item. ### The Item defaults section
Element Description
Item class The item class to which the stock item is assigned. Selecting a class provides default settings for the item. The Item classes (IN201000) window is used to define settings and attributes for items of the class.
Type

The type of stock item. You can select one of the following options:

  • Finished good
  • Component part
  • Subassembly
Kit A check box that indicates (if selected) that this stock item is a kit. The components of the kit can be specified using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Valuation method

The method used for the item for inventory valuation, which by default is the valuation method associated with the item class. You can select another valuation method for the item from the following options:

  • Standard
  • Average
  • FIFO
  • Specific
VAT category The VAT code of the stock item, which by default is the VAT code associated with the item class. You can choose another VAT code if needed.
Posting class The posting class of the stock item, which by default is the posting class assigned to the item class. You can select another posting class for the item. You use the Posting classes (IN206000) window to define posting classes and their properties.
Lot/serial class

The lot/serial class to which the stock item is assigned. Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define lot/serial classes and their properties.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Automatic incremental value

The start value for the automatic incremented segment. Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define this value.

Note

You can only set the start value for the auto-incremental segment if the option Share the auto-incremental value between all class items is cleared for the chosen class in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Webhook notification When this check box is selected and saved for a stock item, you will be notified regarding changes. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the stock item.
### The Warehouse defaults section
Element Description
Default warehouse

The default warehouse used to store the stock item with the specified item ID. Use the Warehouses (IN204000) window to define warehouses and their properties.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If the Multiple warehouses functionality is disabled, the MAIN warehouse is the default warehouse.

Default issue from

The location of the warehouse to be used by default to issue quantities of the selected stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Default receipt to

The location of warehouse to be used by default to receive certain quantities of the specified stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

### The Unit of measurement section
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for this stock item. All other units in the Unit conversion table are expressed with respect to this unit.
Sales unit

The UoM to be used as the sales unit for the stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Purchase unit

The UoM to be used as the purchase unit for the stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) for the system to mark the order as shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
### The Unit conversion table
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide The operation to be performed for unit conversion. You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
Price adjustment multiplier Changes the price automatically if you change the UoM.
### The Stocktaking section
Element Description
Stocktaking cycles The stocktaking cycle assigned to the stock item. The cycle defines how often the stocktaking counts will be performed for the stock item. Stocktaking cycles and their properties are defined in the Stocktaking types (IN208900) window.
ABC code The ABC code this item is assigned to for the purpose of stocktaking.
Fixed ABC code A check box that indicates (if selected) that the ABC code assigned to the item should not be changed automatically when ABC code assignments are updated.
Movement class The movement class this item is assigned to for purpose of stocktaking.
Fixed movement class A check box that indicates (if selected) that the movement class assigned to the item should not be changed automatically when movement class assignments are updated.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
CN code Commodity codes according to the Combined nomenclature (CN) annually revised and published as a Commission regulation in the EU, Requirement for Intrastat reporting.
Country of origin The country the shipments is sent from.
Supplementary measure unit Standardised codes (EU) for measure units for Intrastat reporting. Required for certain types of items.
## The Price/cost information tab You can use the settings on this tab to specify the pending base price and the pending standard cost for the selected stock item, and you can view the cost statistics. ### The Price management section
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission A check box that indicates (if selected) that commissions should be paid on the sale of this stock item.
Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for the stock item.
Mark-up (%) The percentage of the item cost you add to get the selling price for this stock item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of the stock item.
Default price The price of the stock item. This price is used as the default price, if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Customer ledger workspace.
### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost The pending standard cost for the stock item.
Pending cost date The date when the pending standard cost becomes effective.
Current cost Read-only. This field displays the current standard cost for the stock item.
Effective date Read-only. This field shows the effective date for the current standard cost of the stock item.
Last cost Read-only. This field showing the last standard cost defined for the stock item.
### The Cost price statistics section
Element Description
Last cost Read-only. This field showing the last standard cost used for the stock item.
Last cost incl. landed costs

Read-only. The last cost plus landed costs divided per item on the transaction from where the last cost is taken.

This is available when the Include landed cost in unit cost check box is selected in the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window.

Average cost Read-only. This field that displays the average cost for the stock item.
Min. cost Read-only. This field that displays the minimum cost for the stock item.
Max. cost Read-only. This field showing the maximum cost for the stock item.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT Select this option if the item is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the item is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Warehouse details tab This tab displays information about the availability of the item at various warehouses and about warehouse-specific properties of the item. You can change these settings in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. > [!NOTE] > This tab is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Button Description
Add warehouse details Navigates to the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, where you can add warehouse-specific details of the item.
Column Description
Standard This check box indicates (if selected) that this is the standard warehouse for the stock item.
Warehouse The warehouse where the stock item is available.
Default receipt to

The location where the stock item is received by default. The default shipping and receiving locations for the item are specified in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.

Note

This column is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled

Default issue from

The location from which the stock item is issued by default.

Note

This column is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled

Status The status of the warehouse.
Inventory account The default General ledger account to be used for transactions related to the stock item. This account can be defined for the warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Inventory sub. The default General ledger subaccount to be used for transactions related to the stock item. This subaccount can also be defined for the warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Product work group The product work group for this stock item, which is defined in The top part of this window.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this stock item, which is defined in The top part of this window.
Override standard cost This check box indicates (if selected) that the standard cost may be overridden for this stock item. This option is assigned on the Price/cost information tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Price override This check box indicates (if selected) that the price can be overridden for this stock item. (This option is also assigned on the Price/cost information tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.)
Qty. on hand The quantity of this item available (on hand) at the warehouse. This value is calculated based on the availability settings specified for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Override preferred supplier This check box indicates (if selected) that you may choose a supplier other than the preferred supplier for the item replenishment in this warehouse.
Default supplier The preferred supplier for this stock item when stocked at this warehouse, as defined in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates (if selected) that you may change replenishment settings for this item at this warehouse.
Seasonality The seasonality settings used for this item at this warehouse, by their ID.
Replenishment source The source for the item replenishment.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse that serves as the replenishment source for the item if the item stock is replenished by a transfer.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that you may change the service level for this item.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to this item at this warehouse.
Last forecast date The date when the forecast for this item was calculated last.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand for the item at this warehouse according to the forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error calculated for the forecasted daily demand.
## The Supplier details tab On this tab, you can define the supplier from which the item is purchased, view the supplier's prices for the item, and display the terms of quantity discount schedules offered by the supplier. The supplier's prices can be updated when a new price catalogue is received from the supplier.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item. Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item. When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.
Supplier ID The ID of the supplier. The list of suppliers is maintained using the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location The supplier’s location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item.
Purchase unit The unit of measure in which the item is purchased. This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.
Supplier item ID The Item ID used by supplier for this item.
Lead time (days)

Read only.

This column shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the values in the following columns should be overridden. You can change the values in these columns only if this check box is selected.
Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.

Min. order freq. (days) The minimum purchase frequency for the item when purchased from this supplier.
Min. order qty. The minimum order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier. The system uses this value when you prepare replenishment requests in the Prepare replenishment (IN508000) window.
Max. order qty. The maximum order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier. The system uses this value when you prepare replenishment requests in the Prepare replenishment (IN508000) window.
Lot size The lot size for the item when purchased from this supplier.
EOQ The economic order quantity when the item is purchased from this supplier. This value represents the quantity on the order that minimises the total inventory holding costs and ordering costs.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item you purchase.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the stock item.

## The Attributes tab Use this tab to view and enter additional information about the stock item, such as attributes and the sales categories. Also, by using the elements available on this tab, you can select a file that contains an image of the stock item and upload it to the system (the image will be displayed on this tab). ### The Attributes table
Column Description
Attribute The attribute available for this stock item. The list of attributes is defined for the item class.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute specific to the item.
### The Sales categories table
Column Description
Category ID The sales category identifier.
## The Packaging tab On this tab, you add information about the item properties that can be used for packaging. ### The Measurements section
Column Description
Weight The weight of the base unit of the stock item, expressed in the weight unit of measure.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used to measure weight.
Volume The volume of the base unit of the stock item, measured in the volume UOM.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used to measure volume.
### The Automatic packaging section
Column Description
Packaging option

The option that the system uses to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for this item on each sales order. You can select one of the following options:

Manual
To let the user select boxes for this item at the user’s discretion.
By weight
To select appropriate boxes by item weight on the order. In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the maximum weight (measured in the specified UoMs) that can fit into each box. This item can be combined in a box with other items if the Pack separately option is not selected for the item.
By quantity
To select appropriate boxes by item quantity on the order. With this option selected, the item will be always packed separately from other items. (The Pack separately check box will be selected automatically and will not be available for editing.) In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the quantities (measured in the specified UoMs) that can fit into each box.
By weight and volume
To select boxes for this item by weight and by volume. This option is intended for items that can be packed with other items. If you select this option, do not select the Pack separately option. In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the maximum weight and maximum volume that can fit into each box.
Pack separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that this item should be packed separately from other items. This check box is automatically selected (and not available for editing) if By quantity is selected as the packaging option.
## The Cross-reference tab You use this tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the stock item used in your company and identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternative codification used for the item, if applicable. You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
Use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
Use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
Use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
Use this type to specify (or enter it by using a bar code scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the stock item (under the specified item ID) as used by the supplier or customer.
UoM The unit of measure used for this alternative item ID.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
Default A check box you select to set the current alternative item ID as the default alternative item ID.
## The Replenishment information tab On this tab, you can specify replenishment settings and parameters that are used for the item by default in any warehouse. You can use the default settings of the item class, or you can specify other values if needed for this item. For particular warehouses, the item replenishment settings can be overridden by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window.
Column Description
Repl. class The replenishment class to be used to replenish the stock of this item. To define the replenishment class or view its details, use the Replenishment classes (IN208800) window.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings to be used with the replenishment class.
Source

The replenishment source to be used for the stock item. By default, it is the replenishment source associated with the replenishment class. You can select another source, if necessary, from the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Purchase
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be purchased.
Manufacturing
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be manufactured.
Transfer
The requested quantity of the item will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Drop-shipment
The option to be used by default for the item if this item is usually sold by using drop ship orders.
Purchase to order
The item will be purchased only when a customer order exists. If the purchased item will be received at the default (for the item) warehouse, for the quantity requested on the order, a transfer order will be generated automatically.
Method

The replenishment method to be used for the stock item with the selected replenishment source. This can be one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed for the stock item. The value associated with the Purchase to order replenishment source.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. The quantity on supply is the quantity of the item on unreleased purchase orders, on purchase receipts, and in transit.
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment for the item once the minimum stock level is reached and the quantity on replenishment request will be equal to the economical order quantity (EOQ) value specified for the chosen supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse used as a source of replenishment if the source is Purchase to order, Drop-shipment, or Transfer.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the stock item can be stored in a warehouse.
Launch date The date starting the time period when the specified replenishment settings will be in effect for this stock item.
Termination date The date ending the time period when the selected replenishment settings will apply to this stock item.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to the item. For details, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast
Safety stock The safety stock (in base units) of the stock item to be used to calculate the quantity required for replenishment; these extra quantities of the item are kept at a warehouse to prevent possible stock-outs.
Reorder point The stock level that, when reached, prompts the system to initiate stock replenishment for the stock item. This quantity should be set equal to the anticipated demand during the lead time plus the safety stock.
Max. qty. The maximum stock level for the replenishment. When the quantity of the item falls below the Reorder point value, the system generates a replenishment request with the quantity required to replenish the stock up to the Max. qty. value.
Transfer ERQ The economic reorder quantity defined for transfers that involves this stock item. This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.
Demand forecast model The demand forecast model to be used to calculate replenishment parameters for this item.
Forecast period type

The type of period to be used for selecting historical data for the model, which can be one of the following:

  • Quarter
  • Month
  • Week
  • Day
Periods to analyse The number of periods to be used for selecting historical data for the model.
## The Deferral settings tab Use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for the stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed and the revenue or expense will be recognized immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sale will be recognised according to the code's schedule. If the stock item is a package, also known as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue (or expense) recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table. ### The top part
Element Description
Deferral code The deferral code assigned to the stock item.
Default term The standard amount of years a term consists of.
Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccounts will be used in the component-associated deferrals.
Total percentage The total percentage of the item price, as split among components. This value is calculated automatically as you add components and specify percentages for them. If the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.
### The Revenue components table
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component.
Sales account The income account used to record sales for this component.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used to record sales for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for the component.
Deferral code The deferral code assigned to this component.
Default term The standard term of the specified units for the component.
Default term UoM The standard UoM used for the component.
Allocation method An option indicating whether you will specify the component’s price as a percentage of the item’s price or a fixed amount in the columns that follow. Select Percentage or Fixed amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Amount option column.
Percentage This component’s percentage of the item’s price if the Percentage option is selected in the Amount option column.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you specify the default General ledger accounts to be used for inventory transactions performed with the stock item. For a new item, these elements are initially populated by the settings of the posting class selected for the item on the **General settings** tab of this window. Posting classes can be created in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. You can override the posting settings for the item by selecting the appropriate accounts and subaccounts.
Element Description
Inventory account

The asset account to be used for posting inventory transactions related to this stock item.

This account is used if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.

Inventory sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account.
Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used for this stock item when the transaction has a reason code specified.
Sales account The income account to be used for this stock item to record sales.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used for this item to record sales.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used for this stock item to record non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used for this stock item to record EU sales.
Sales - export account The income account to be used for this stock item to record export sales.
COGS account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record the cost of goods sold (COGS) once the sales order is released.
COGS sub. The subaccount to be used for this item with the COGS account.
Expense acct, non-taxable The income account to be used for this stock item to record non-taxable expenses.
Expense EU account The income account to be used for this stock item to record EU expenses.
Expense account, import The income account to be used for this stock item to record import expenses.
Standard cost variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences between the currently effective standard cost and the cost on the inventory receipt for the specified quantities of the stock item. This account will be used only if this item is assigned the standard cost valuation method.
Standard cost variance sub The subaccount to be used for this stock item with the standard cost variance account.
Standard cost revaluation account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record the differences in inventory value estimated by using the pending standard cost and the currently effective standard cost for the quantities on hand of the stock item. Revaluation is performed at the moment of updating standard costs or when the currently effective standard cost becomes the last standard cost, and the pending cost becomes the effective standard cost. This account will be used only if this item is assigned the standard cost valuation method.
Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used for this stock item with the standard cost revaluation account.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used for this stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item. Whenever receipts linked to purchase orders are released, the system generates transactions between the purchase accrual account and the inventory account.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice. This account is used if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method.
Purchase price variance sub. The subaccount to be used for this item with the purchase price variance account.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences in landed costs that occurred between the landed costs amounts specified on purchase receipts and the amounts on inventory receipts.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the landed cost variance account for this item.
Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferral amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
### The Excise duty section This section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The priority order in which the accounts in this section are used is: 1. from the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and if empty, 1. from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. For information about the generated General ledger batch, see [About excise duties](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/about-excise-duties/).
Element Description
Sales account The income account that is connected to the VAT payable account (it has a set VAT category). The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Sales sub The subaccount to be used with the sales account.
Sales offset account The income account that is not connected to the VAT payable account (it does not have a set VAT category), used to balance the sales account. The excise duty amounts are recorded in debit.
Sales offset sub The subaccount to be used with the sales offset account.
Payable account The liability account that accumulates the excise duty amounts to be paid to a tax agency for the excise duty reporting period. The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Payable sub The corresponding payable subaccount.
### The Expense accounts section These details are only applicable on purchase invoices with stock items and their expense tracking.
Element Description
Use Expense accounts If this check box is selected and when a purchase invoice is released, the following transactions will be added to journal transactions.
Purchase P&L (debit) Select an account here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Purchase P&L sub. Select a subaccount here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L (credit) Select an account for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L sub. Select a subaccount for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Purchase EU Select an account here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase EU sub. Select a subaccount here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import Select an account for a non-EU supplier.
Purchase import sub. Select a subaccount for a non-EU supplier.
## The Restriction groups tab This tab provides information about sub item restriction groups and restriction groups the item is included in. The list of groups is read-only and cannot be changed in this window. By using this window, you can only include the item in a group or exclude the item from a group. If subitems are enabled in your system, the sub item restriction groups are created using the [Restriction groups (SM201030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-sm201030/) window and listed in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window.
Custom action Description
Group details Navigates to the Restriction groups (SM201030) window, where you can view details of the restriction group.
Column Description
Group name The name of the sub item restriction group or restriction group.
Specific type The functional type of the group.
Description A brief description of the group.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the group is active.
Group type

A read-only column that shows the type of the restriction group:

  • A
  • A inverse
  • B
  • B inverse
## The Excise duty tab This tab section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. On this tab, you can view the excise duties this item is connected to, as set in the [Duty items (EF208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-items-ef208000/) window. Here, you also set the conversion factor from the duty UoM to the item's base unit, if these UoMs are not the same.
Column Description
Duty type The duty type ID.
Duty group The duty group ID.
From duty UoM The duty rate unit for the duty type and group, as set in the Duty rates (EF207000) window.
Multiply/divide The operation to be performed for conversion from the duty UoM to the UoM specified as the base unit. Only Multiply is supported.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation Multiply. When the duty UoM and item’s base unit are the same, the conversion factor is automatically set to 1.
To item base UoM The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that include tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a stock item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific stock item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Stocktaking cycles (IN208700) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700 page You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking cycles (IN208700) You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. The stocktaking cycles are used to group the stock items for periodic counting with the class-specific period. For more details on using stocktaking cycles, see: [Overview of stocktaking options.](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The table This table displays the stocktaking cycles defined in the system. You can edit and define new cycles.
Column Description
Cycle ID The ID of the stocktaking cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 6 characters can be used.
Description A brief description of the stocktaking cycle.
Counts per year The number of counts per year for the stocktaking cycle.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Stocktaking count (IN305010) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010 page In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the Counting in progress status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking count (IN305010) In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the Counting in progress status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the **Counting in progress** status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. Once you enter any digit in this window, the system commits the data to the database. This makes the entered data immediately visible to all users who may be simultaneously using this window for data entry or managing the stocktaking in the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. For more information about how to take stocktaking with Visma Net, see [About stocktaking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking/) ## The top part You use this area to select a stocktaking document with the **Counting in progress** status. For your convenience while you are entering count data, you can select the lines that contain particular stock items, relate to a particular location, or fall within a particular range of line numbers.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the stocktaking document, which the system automatically assigned when a user generated this document by using the Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) window.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stocktaking counting is performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The warehouse location.

Select a location to display only the lines related to it, or make no selection to display lines related to all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item ID

A stock item.

Select a particular stock item to display only the lines with this item. Make no selection to display lines related to all stock items.

Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Description The description of the stocktaking document.
Freeze date The date when all operations with the items involved in physical counting were frozen.
Number of lines The number of lines the document contains.
From line no. The start number of the range of lines to be displayed.
Last line no. The end number of the range of lines to be displayed.
## The table This table contains the list of stock items arranged by warehouse location, subitem, and lot or serial number in the order specified in the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window. The quantities resulting from stocktaking should be entered manually. Each line in the document has its own status. Once a quantity is entered for the line, the status of the line changes from **Not entered** or **Skipped** to **Entered**.
Button Description
Add Opens the Add line dialog box, which you use to enter an item. This dialog box can be used to efficiently enter information about items using a bar code scanner.
Column Description
Status

The status of the current line in the stocktaking document, which indicates whether count data was entered for it.

Lines with no count data have the Not entered status.

Line no.

The number of the line in the stocktaking document.

A line number is assigned to one or more items that have the same item ID, are located in the same storage location, and, if applicable, have a specific subitem code or lot or serial number.

Tag no.

The tag number for the line item.

Note

This column is only available if the Use tags option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window was selected at the time the document was created.

Item ID The item ID of the line item.
Description The description that was provided for the item.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Book quantity The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Physical quantity The physical quantity of the item; this value is entered manually for the item.
Variance quantity The difference between the book quantity and the physical quantity for the item, as calculated automatically by the system.
### The Add line dialog box By using this dialog box, you can add a line specifying an stock item, and you can effectively add items by scanning their bar codes. To accomplish this, make sure the **Add receipt line automatically** option is selected. Once the item bar code is scanned, the system finds the item record and fills in the dialog box elements using the item default values. Then you can select the **Add one unit per bar code** option to increase the item quantity by one unit each time you scan the bar code or enter the item quantity manually.
Element Description
Barcode An optional element that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
UoM The read-only element that displays the unit of measure for the items.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Qty. The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Add one unit per barcode If you select this check box, the system increases the item quantity by one unit each time the item bar code is scanned or entered manually.
Auto add line If you select this check box, the system automatically adds a new line to the review for each bar code scanned for the first time. If the bar code has been scanned before, the item quantity will be increased by one unit.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Stocktaking review (IN305000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000 page Use this window to view the results of a completed stocktaking and to manage the counting and data entry processes for an active stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking review (IN305000) Use this window to view the results of a completed stocktaking and to manage the counting and data entry processes for an active stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can select an active stocktaking document, start the count data entry process, review and edit the results of the counting, complete the stocktaking review process, or cancel the stocktaking document. You generate stocktaking documents by using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window, and count data is entered in the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Finish counting Changes the status of the stocktaking document to Counting in progress, which makes the document available for data entry. If the Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state check box was not selected for this warehouse, this action also reverses the freezing of the warehouse or item involved.
Complete stocktaking Completes the stocktaking review process. As a result, the status of the stocktaking document changes to Completed.
Cancel stocktaking

Cancels the stocktaking review process and changes the status of the current stocktaking document to Cancelled.

Usually, the user cancels the document if it is not correct or it contains unmatched data. Cancelled documents do not generate inventory adjustment transactions.

## The top part In this area, you select a stocktaking document to review its data.
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the stocktaking document to be reviewed.
Warehouse

An info field that shows the warehouse where the stocktaking count is performed.

Note

This field only is displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Status

An info field that shows the current status of this stocktaking document. The following options are available:

Counting in progress
Indicates that the stocktaking counting process is occurring and the stocktaking document can be edited. You can modify and save a document with this status. After all the available data has been entered, you can complete the counting process by clicking Finish counting.
Completed
Means that the counting and reviewing are completed. Documents with the Completed status cannot be modified.
Cancelled
Indicates that the document was cancelled and the data in the document was not used for generating adjustments. Documents with the Cancelled status cannot be edited.
Freeze date

An info field that shows the date when the stocktaking document was created.

On this date, all stock items selected for the stocktaking were “frozen,” meaning that no operations for these items are allowed until the document is cancelled or the counting process is completed.

Description The description of the stocktaking.
Total physical qty.

An info field showing the total actual quantity of all stock items listed in the document.

The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all physical quantities of all items listed.

Total variance qty.

An info field showing the total variance quantity for the document.

The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of differences between the book quantity and the physical quantity for each item in the list.

Total variance cost

An info field showing the total variance cost for all stock items listed in the document.

The system automatically calculates this cost as the sum of differences between the item’s book quantity and the physical quantity for all items in the document.

## The Stocktaking details tab This tab displays the list of stock items for the selected document. Generally, the information about item physical quantities should be entered manually using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window, but it can be entered using this window too. Depending on whether the data has been entered, the statuses of the lines in the document may change. Documents that have lines with the **Not entered** status cannot be completed. To complete the stocktaking count, for lines with **Not entered** status (for which the data is not available), perform one of these actions: + Set zeros as physical quantities by clicking **Set not entered to zero**. + Set the statuses of the lines to **Skipped** by clicking **Set not entered to skipped**.
Button Description
Add Opens the Add line dialog box, which you use to enter a new line for the item. This dialog box can be used to efficiently enter information about items using a bar code scanner.
Update actual cost Updates the cost of the stock items using quantities resulting from the stocktaking. The average cost is used for all items, no matter what cost valuation method is assigned.
Set not entered to zero Sets zero as the physical quantity for each line with the Not entered status and changes the status of the line to Entered.
Set not entered to skipped For each line with the Not entered status, changes the status to Skipped. The lines with the Skipped status are not processed by the system.
Column Description
Status

The status of the line of the stocktaking document, which indicates whether the actual physical quantity has been specified for the line.

Lines with no data have the Not entered status.

When you enter the count data in the line, its status changes to Entered.

You can also change the status of the lines from Not entered to Skipped. The system does not process the lines with the Skipped status.

Line no. The number of the line in the stocktaking document.
Tag no. The tag number for the line item, which is the stock item with the properties specified in the line, such as location, subitem, and lot or serial number.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Description The description provided for the item.
Subitem

The subitem code of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Stock subitems functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Book quantity The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Physical quantity The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Variance quantity The difference between the book quantity and the physical quantity for the line item. This value is calculated automatically by the system.
Unit cost The last cost of the item’s base unit as approximation of its unit cost during the count. (The last cost is shown here for all items, no matter which cost valuation method is assigned to the item.) When the stocktaking is completed, the actual unit cost will be recalculated in accordance with the valuation method, count results, and other settings.
Ext. variance cost The difference between the extended cost calculated based on the book quantity and the extended cost calculated based on the physical quantity for the item.
Reason code The reason code for the item. To define the reason codes, use the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
### The Add line dialog box
Element Description
Barcode An optional field that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Subitem

The subitem code of the item.

Note

This field is displayed only if the Stock subitems functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

UoM Read only. This field displays the unit of measure for the items.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Qty. The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Add one unit per bar code If you select this check box, the system increases the item quantity by one unit each time the item barcode is scanned or entered manually.
Auto add line

If you select this check box, the system automatically adds a new line to the review for each bar code scanned for the first time.

If the bar code has been scanned before, the item quantity will be increased by one unit.

Add Adds the entered data as a line to the review if the Add line automatically option was not selected.
Add and close Adds the entered data as a line to the review and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the review.
## The Adjustment info tab This tab displays information about adjustments generated for the document. An adjustment is generated for all line items for which there are transactions recorded in the database.
Element Description
Adjustment ref. no.

The reference number of the adjustment document generated for the stocktaking document.

Click the number to view the adjustment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Stocktaking types (IN208900) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900 page In this window, you can define the types of stocktaking to be used at your company warehouse or warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking types (IN208900) In this window, you can define the types of stocktaking to be used at your company warehouse or warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use this area to create a new type of stocktaking. You can also select an existing type to modify it or view its details.
Element Description
Type ID The unique ID of the type of the stocktaking.
Description A description of the type.
Generation method

The method to be used to generate stocktaking sheets for the type. Select one of the following options:

Full stocktaking
To include all the items available at the specified warehouse or locations.
By item
To count only particular stock items, which you specify on the Item selection tab.
By movement class
To include only the items for which stocktaking is due according to the stocktaking frequency associated with their movement classes. If you select this generation method, choose the movement class on the Movement class selection tab. The stocktaking frequency of a movement class is the number of counts per year required for its items, as set in the Movement classes (IN208600) window.
By ABC code
To include only the items associated with the specific code or items for which counting is due according to stocktaking frequency associated with items’ ABC codes. You can select the code using the appropriate tab. The stocktaking frequency is determined by the stocktaking per year value, as set in the ABC codes (IN208500) window.
By cycle
To include only the items for which stocktaking is due according to the assigned stocktaking cycles. You can select the cycle by using the appropriate tab.
By item class
To include only items belonging to the specific class. You can select the class by using the appropriate tab.
## The Warehouse/location selection tab > [!NOTE] > This tab is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. By using this tab, you can view or define the warehouse where stocktaking of this type take place. If the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system, you can specify locations. If no warehouse and locations are specified for this type of stocktaking, the type can be used at any warehouse and any locations. You can select the particular warehouse and locations for generating stocktaking sheets in the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window.
Element Description
Warehouse The particular warehouse where stocktaking of this type will take place. You can leave the field blank to apply this type at any warehouse.
Button Description
Add

Opens the dialog box that you can use to enter a scope of locations.

Select the start location in the Start location field, select the end location in the End location field, and then click Add to add the selected scope of locations to the Locations table.

Column Description
Location The location where counting of the type will take place.
Description The description of the location.
Pick priority The pick priority specified for the location.
## The Assignment order tab On this tab, you define the order in which tag and line numbers are assigned to items on the count sheets prepared for stocktakings of this type. ### The Line and tag number assignment order section These elements are used to specify how the line numbers and tags should be generated for items included in the stocktaking. In the list, the items will be grouped by the first value; in each first-level group, the items will be grouped by the second value, and so forth. Tags will be generated if the **Use tags** check box in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window is selected.
Element Description
1

An option to group list items for the stocktaking’s first-level groups. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
2

An option defining the order of items in each first-level group. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
3

An option defining the order of items in each of the second-level groups. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
4

An option defining the order of items in each third-level group. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • By item ID - Lists the items by their item ID.

+

  • By lot/serial number - Lists the items by lot or serial number.
  • By item description - Lists items by their item descriptions.
Element Description
Blank lines to add The number of blank lines (if any) to be added at the end of the stocktaking sheets, for use by employees if any unregistered items are detected and counted.
## The Item selection tab You use this tab, which appears when you select the **By item** generation method, to create a list of particular stock items for counts of this stocktaking type; you can instead select items at random, by their previous stocktaking date, or if they have negative quantities at one or more locations. ### The Selection method section
Element Description
Selection method

The option to be used for selecting stock items for stocktaking of the type:

Items with negative book qty.
Includes in the count items that have a negative quantity at one or more locations.
Random items (up to)
Includes items selected at random up to the specified number of items. You specify the Number of items, which appears once the option is selected.
List of items
Includes the specific items you list in the Items table.
Last count on or before
Includes items that were counted before the specified number of days from the current business date. Specify the number of days in Last count before (days), which appears if you choose this option.
Button Description
Add Opens the dialog box that enables you to add multiple items to the Items table.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the stock item.
Description The description provided for the stock item.
Item status The status of the stock item.
Item class The item class associated with the item.
## The Movement class selection tab This tab, which appears only if you select the **By movement class** generation method, provides item selection options associated with movement classes.
Element Description
Movement class The movement class whose items will be included in the count of the type.
By frequency This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all movement classes.
## The ABC code selection tab This tab, which appears when you select the **By ABC code** generation method, provides item selection options associated with ABC codes.
Element Description
ABC code The ABC code whose items will be included in the count of the type.
By frequency This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all ABC codes.
## The stocktaking cycle selection tab This tab, appearing only when you select the **By cycle** generation method, provides two alternative item selection options associated with the stocktaking cycles.
Element Description
Cycle ID

The stocktaking cycle whose items will be included in the stocktaking of the type.

Select the cycle and clear the By frequency check box.

By frequency

This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all stocktaking cycles.

Selecting the check box disables the Cycle ID box.

## The Item class selection tab By using this tab (shown only if you select the **By item class** generation method), you can select the item class for this stocktaking type.
Element Description
Item class ID The item class.
Description The description of the item class

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/summary-of-items-sold-and-purchased-in40199s page You use this window to view detailed information about items sold and purchased, and quantities on shipments and receipts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S) You use this window to view detailed information about items sold and purchased, and quantities on shipments and receipts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The number of sold items - the sold quantity - consists of the quantity on shipment and the open quantity. This number is aggregated per item ID. You can specify criteria to filter the data to be displayed. ## The top part In this area, you can select a summary of items sold and purchased, and they can be grouped by financial period. You can also include your incomplete document lines in this summary.
Element Description
Item ID Select which item ID you want to be shown from the Select - Item ID dialog box.
Item class Select which item class you want to be shown from the Select - Item class dialog box.
Item type

Select the item type you want to be shown. You have three options:

  • All:
  • Stock item:
  • Non-stock item:
From period Select from which period you want the items to be shown from the Select - From period dialog box.
To period Select to which period you want the items to be shown from the Select - To period dialog box.
Include incomplete document lines If this check box is selected, the incomplete document lines will also be listed. Incomplete lines are the transactions for sold or purchased items which have not been shipped or received yet.
Group by financial period If this check box is selected, you see the items grouped by the period in which they were sold and purchased.
## The table The items will be listed in the table area.
Element Description
Item The ID of the item.
Type The type of the item.
Item description The description of the item.
Quantity sold The quantity of the item that is sold.
Qty. on shipments The quantity of the item that is shipped.
Quantity purchased The quantity of the item that is purchased.
Qty. on receipt The quantity of the item that has been received.
Item class The item class of the item.
Item class description The description of the item class.
Period The period in which the item was sold or purchased.
Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/pro-forma-invoice-so64300s section You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number; select one of the open shipments to prepare the pro forma invoice for it.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Transfers (IN304000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000 page This window is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfers (IN304000) This window is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to view, edit, and create transfer documents, as well as to release balanced transfers. The processing of transfers depends on certain selections in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. By default, transfers are saved with the **On hold** status if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected. Document totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected. When you release a transfer, its transactions will be posted to the general ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. Transfers can be defined as one-step or as two-step, performed by using the **in-transit** account and completed by receipts at the target warehouses. For more information about inventory transfers, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the document release process, which changes the status of the transfer document to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports related to inventory transfer:

## The top part In this part, you can select an existing transfer document by its reference number or specify summary information about a new transfer.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the transfer document, which the system automatically assigns according to the sequence assigned to transfers in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The status of the transfer. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited manually or deleted. A document with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document’s transactions are balanced. A document with this status can be modified, deleted, or released.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. A document with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that, if selected, indicates that the transfer document has the status On hold status. Clear the check box to save the transfer with the status Balanced.
Transfer type

The type of transfer. The following options are available:

1-step
The transfer operation is performed in one step: The goods are transferred from the warehouse to the destination warehouse location.
2-step
The transfer operation is made in two steps: The goods are issued at the source location and received at the target location.
Date The date when the transfer document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the transfer document should be posted.
From warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are transferred.
To warehouse The warehouse to which the goods are transferred.
External ref. Any external reference number of the inventory transfer document.
Description A brief description of the document or the transactions entered.
Control qty.

The manually entered quantity of goods transferred; available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.

When you’re creating a transfer, you enter this value manually to confirm the total quantity of stock items transferred, compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document.

If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.

Total qty. The total quantity of goods transferred.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table containing the transactions included in the transfer document.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can specify how the quantity of the item is split among different locations, lot or serial numbers, and expiration dates.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add an item to the document.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so that you can view item availability data.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the goods to be transferred.
Location

The warehouse location from which the goods are transferred.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

To location ID

The warehouse location to which the goods are transferred.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the goods to be transferred.
Quantity The quantity of the transferred goods (in the units indicated below).
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the transferred goods.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Expiration date

The expiration date of the transferred goods.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Reason code The reason code associated with the transferred goods.
Description A brief description of the goods transfer transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item or assign subitems. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The Allocations dialog box includes the following elements:
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Generate (button)

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same sub item code and the same lot number. It is 1 for items with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for the selected source warehouse and its locations and to add specific quantities of the items to the transfer document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field. The dialog box has a top part and a table with items that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
Item

The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.

Barcode

The bar code of the item to be listed.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.

Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Item class ID

The item class of the items whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.

Receipt no. The reference number of a particular receipt. Select a receipt by its reference number to view availability information for the items that were listed on the selected receipt. Deselect the Show available items only check box to view the information on the listed items that are not currently available.
Show available items only If you select this check box, the system will list only items whose available quantities are greater than zero in the table.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items to the document.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number of the batch generated upon release of the transfer.
Element Description
Batch no.

The reference number of the batch generated for the transfer.

Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the transaction details.

Branch The branch that initiated the transfer.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Update ABC code (IN506000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000 page You can use this window to make mass changes to the ABC codes assigned to the stock items in a selected warehouse, assigning each item a specific ABC code based on the stock value of the item in the chosen financial period and the code definitions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update ABC code (IN506000) You can use this window to make mass changes to the ABC codes assigned to the stock items in a selected warehouse, assigning each item a specific ABC code based on the stock value of the item in the chosen financial period and the code definitions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The system arranges items by decreasing percentages in total stock value, calculates subtotals for each item (starting from the top of the list), and assigns projected ABC codes in accordance with the code threshold percentages. For details, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) In this window, you can also view the list of stock items with their current and projected ABC codes, and update the ABC code assignments for the listed items. Fixed ABC codes assigned to items in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window are not reassigned during this processing. You define the ABC codes for your site by using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. Initially, you can manually assign ABC codes to items at a specific warehouse on the **General settings** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. ## The top part In this area, you select the warehouse where the ABC code assignments will be updated and the financial period used to provide cost and stock value statistics for assigning ABC codes to items.
Button Description
Process

Updates the ABC code assignments for the stock items listed in the details table, using your ABC code definitions from the ABC codes (IN208500) window.

Fixed codes are not reassigned during processing.

Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the ABC code assignment will be performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period The financial period the ABC code assignment will be based on.
## The table This table shows the read-only list of items available in the selected warehouse for which ABC code assignments will be updated, based on the data of the chosen financial period. If no data is available for the period, the lowest code is assigned to all items. Assignment of codes is performed automatically and cannot be edited by using this window.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item at the warehouse whose ABC code can be updated.
Description The description of the stock item.
Current ABC code The ABC code currently assigned to the stock item.
Fixed

This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code is fixed for this stock item.

Fixed ABC codes are not updated. You can assign fixed ABC codes to a stock item by using the Stock items (IN202500) window.

Criteria value The criterion value for the item.
Ratio (%) The ratio (expressed as a percent) calculated for the item as the criterion value (item stock value) divided by the criterion total value (for all items).
Cumulative ratio (%) The sum of ratios from the top of the list, including the current item.
Projected ABC code

The ABC code to be assigned to the stock item.

This assignment is based on the code definition and on the stock value of the item for the selected period.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Update movement class (IN506100) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100 page You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update movement class (IN506100) You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. Movement class assignments are based on the turnover of each item during the selected turnover period. When you update movement class assignments in this window, the system assigns the projected movement class to each item, based on the movement class definitions and the position of the item in the list of warehouse items, which are arranged by turnover rate in the selected period. You define movement classes in the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window. You can initially assign the movement classes to items stored at the specific warehouse manually on the **General settings** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. In the Update movement class window, you can view the list of stock items with pending movement class assignments and update the assignments for the listed items. Items with a fixed movement class are also listed, but their assignments are not updated automatically. ## The top part In this area, you can select the warehouse where the movement class assignments will be updated and the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated. The number of these periods per year and, thus, the length of each period is defined by the **Turnover periods per year** setting on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window.
Button Description
Process Updates the movement class assignments for the stock items listed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the movement class assignments will be updated.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is used by default.

Year The year of the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.
Period number

Read-only. This field shows the number (within the year) of the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.

Start date

Read-only. This field displays the start date of the period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.

End date

Read-only. This field displays the end date of the period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.

## The table This table holds the read-only list of items for which the movement class assignments will be updated.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item for which the movement class assignment can be updated.
Description The description of this stock item.
Current movement class The movement class currently assigned to this stock item.
Fixed

This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class is fixed for this stock item, which means that its movement class assignments are not updated.

A fixed movement class can be assigned to a stock item using the Stock items (IN202500) window.

Projected movement class The movement class to be assigned to the stock item base on the turnover rate and movement class definitions.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Update standard costs (IN502000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000 page By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update standard costs (IN502000) By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. You can view by warehouse the list of the stock items with pending standard costs and update the standard costs for all items displayed in the list or only those you select. You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and override the costs for a particular warehouse by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. When standard costs are updated, the system generates adjustments for the items being processed to make the necessary cost corrections. ## The top part Use the elements in this area to select the warehouse where the standard costs will be updated and the latest effective pending cost date.
Button Description
Process Updates the standard costs for the stock items you have selected by using the unlabelled check boxes in the Details area.
Process all Updates the standard costs for all stock items listed in the Details area.
Element Description
Warehouse

Select the warehouse or leave this box empty to view the stock items for all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Max. pending cost date The latest effective pending cost date.
Revalue inventory A check box that you select if inventory revaluation should be performed during processing.
## The table In this area, the stock items with pending standard costs are shown in a table, and you can select the items for which standard costs will be updated.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item whose pending standard cost can be updated.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock item is stocked.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Inventory account The asset account to be used for the adjustment generated in the process of updating the standard cost of the item.
Inventory sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used with the inventory account.
Pending cost The value set as a pending cost for the item.
Pending cost date The date selected for the stock item as the effective date for the pending cost.
Current cost The currently effective standard cost assigned to the stock item.
Standard cost override An informational check box that indicates (if selected) that the standard cost of the item may be overridden at the selected warehouse.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Validate inventory (IN505000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/validate-inventory-in505000 page You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate inventory (IN505000) You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. The validation process entails recalculating availability data for the selected stock items, based on all open inventory documents and open sales orders. For more information, see: [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). > [!NOTE] > It is recommended that you perform the validation after you change the item availability calculation options. The system will recalculate the item availability and allocation data in accordance with the options selected most recently. The validation process doesn't update the cost layers. In this window, you can view the list of the stock items available at a particular warehouse and perform validation for all items available at the warehouse or for only the selected ones. > [!NOTE] > If, during the validation process, the system recovers available quantities of specific stock items, it attempts to open orders with the **Back order** status created for these items. Starting from the earliest back order, the system checks the quantity on the order. If the quantity is equal to or less than the recovered quantity, the system opens the order and switches to the next back order until either all recovered quantities are applied or all back orders are checked. ## The top part
Button Description
Process Starts the validation process for the chosen stock items or those for which you’ve selected the check box in the table.
Process all Starts the validation process for all stock items listed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the validation will be performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Period The financial period for the validation.
Rebuild item history If you select this check box, the system builds the history of items selected for processing based on the available open and released documents.
Reschedule back orders If you select this check box, the system opens the sales orders with back orders if there are positive changes during the validation.
## The table
Column Description
Item ID The stock item available at the warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity of the base units of the stock item on hand at the selected warehouse.
Qty. available The total quantity of base units of the stock item available at the selected warehouse.
Qty. not available The quantity (in base units) of stock items on locations with the Include in qty. available check box not selected. The option can be found in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Last validation date The date when the stock item was last validated.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Warehouses (IN204000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000 page You use this window to define, view, and modify warehouses and their settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Warehouses (IN204000) You use this window to define, view, and modify warehouses and their settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. After you have defined the settings for your company warehouses, you can use the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window to set up the specific relationships between existing warehouses and stock items, and to define the warehouse settings specific to each item-warehouse combination. For more information about warehouses, see: [Warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

  • View restriction groups: Navigates to the Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010) window.

  • Change the item ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, which you can use to enter a new identifier (ID) for the warehouse.

  • Apply replenishment to item warehouse details with no replenishment class: If replenishment class is missing in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, the system will update the replenishment class for all item warehouse details connected to this warehouse.

    Note

    This action is only available if a replenishment class is set in the Replenishment class field.

  • Apply replenishment to all item warehouse details: Regardless if the replenishment class is missing or not in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, the system will update the replenishment class for all item warehouse details connected to this warehouse.

    Note

    This action is only available if a replenishment class is set in the Replenishment class field.

Reports Provides quick navigation to the following report: Location labels (IN619000).
## The top part In this area, you can create a record for a new warehouse, enter its ID and description, and define how its locations can be added. You can also select an existing warehouse and view or change its settings.
Element Description
Warehouse The unique ID of the warehouse.
Branch The branch to which this warehouse belongs.
Replenishment class

The replenishment class associated with this warehouse.

Replenishment classes are created using the Replenishment classes (IN208800) window.

Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the warehouse is active.
Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state

This check box indicates (if selected) that the inventory in the warehouse will be frozen during the stocktaking and data entry stages of stocktaking.

If it is cleared, the inventory will be frozen only during the stocktaking stage.

Description A brief description of the warehouse.
Location entry

An option indicating whether warehouse locations can be added directly on any inventory document or only by using this window.

Select one of the following options:

Do not allow on-the-fly entry
On-the-fly entry of the warehouse locations is not allowed; new locations can be added only in this window.
Warn, but allow on-the-fly entry
Users are allowed to enter new locations on the fly, but the system will warn the users before allowing new locations to be added.
Allow on-the-fly entry
On-the-fly entry of the warehouse locations is allowed; while filling in a receipt or issue, a user can specify a new location.
Avg. default cost (Default unit cost for average method)

For items with the Average valuation method, the option that defines which of the costs should be used as the unit cost on sales, returns and receipts. You can select one of the following options:

Average
To use the average cost
Last
To use the last cost
FIFO default cost (Default unit cost for FIFO method)

For items with the FIFO valuation method, the option that defines which of the costs should be used as the unit cost on sales, returns and receipts. You can select one of the following options:

Average
To use the average cost
Last
To use the last cost
## The Location table tab > [!NOTE] > This tab only appears if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. > [!NOTE] > If the functionality is disabled, the single **MAIN** location is created automatically and is assigned as the default receiving, shipping, RMA, and drop-ship location. On this tab, you can add new locations and modify the properties of existing ones. The tab includes a table that holds the locations and an area where you can select the receiving, drop-ship, shipping, and return material authorisation (RMA) locations.
Element Description
Receiving location The warehouse location to be used to receive goods.
Shipping location The warehouse location to be used to ship goods.
RMA location

The RMA warehouse location.

The location you select will be used for all goods return operations. The returned goods will be delivered to the specified location, regardless of the warehouse location selected by default for the receipt of these goods.

Drop-ship location

The warehouse location used to account for drop shipments.

The goods will actually be delivered to the customer’s location; by specifying this location, you can maintain data about the item quantities on drop shipments.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Column Description
Location ID The unique ID of the warehouse location.
Description A brief description of the warehouse location.
Active This check box indicates whether this location is active.
Include in qty. available You select this check box if the quantities of goods available at this location will be included in the quantities of available goods and used in inventory transactions, such as issues and transfers.
Cost separately

You select this check box if the costs for goods available at this location will be calculated separately from costs calculated at the system-level; that is, for FIFO and specific valuation methods, separate cost layers will be created for this location.

You cannot select this check box if this is the only location at the warehouse.

CAUTION: We recommend that you not change this option once it has been set.

Sales allowed You select this check box if sales are allowed from this location.
Receipts allowed You select this check box if receipts are allowed at this location.
Transfers allowed You select this check box if transfers are allowed for this location.
Assembly allowed You select this check box if assembly operations are allowed at this location.
Pick priority

A value that indicates the priority of this location when items are chosen.

The value 1 indicates the highest priority, 2 the next highest, and so forth; 0 means that the pick priority is not defined.

Primary item validation

An option indicating whether the operations with the primary item should be validated for this location and how. Select one of the following options:

No validation
No validation for this location is required.
Primary item warning
Validation for this location is required only for the primary item, if another item is being received, a warning will be displayed.
Primary item error
Validation for this location is required only for the primary item. The system generates an error if you try to save the purchase receipt if an item other than the primary item is being received.
Primary item class warning
Validation for this location is required for items of the primary item class. The system will display a warning if items of other than the primary item class are received.
Primary item class error
Validation for this location is required for items from the primary item class. The system generates an error if you try to save the purchase receipt with items from non-primary item class.
Note

Primary item validation is enforced only for received goods.

Primary item

The primary item for this location, which is the item that is received the most often or stored here in the highest volumes.

Select the appropriate item from the list of available stock items.

Primary item class

The primary item class for this location; items of this class are received the most often or stored here in the highest volumes.

Select the appropriate item class from the list of available item classes.

Project The project to associate with this location by default.
Project task The project task to associate with this location by default.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for inventory transactions that originate in this warehouse.
Element Description
Override inventory account/sub.

A check box you select to specify the inventory account and subaccount to be used for inventory transactions related to this warehouse.

When this check box is selected, for each item belonging to this warehouse, the settings in the Use inventory/accrual account from and the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from fields in the Posting classes (IN206000) window, will be overruled.

Inventory account

The asset account to be used for posting inventory transactions related to this warehouse.

This account is used if the option Warehouse is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items belonging to this warehouse, or if the check box Override inventory account/sub. is selected in this tab.

Inventory sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items belonging to this warehouse, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account.

If the check box Override inventory account/sub. is selected in this tab, this is the subaccount that will be used with the inventory account.

Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used with any reason code for transactions originated in this warehouse.
Sales account The income account to be used to record sales made from this warehouse.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used for sales made from this warehouse.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record EU sales.
Sales - export account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record export sales.
COGS/expense account The expense account to be used to record the cost of goods sold (COGS) when sales are made from this warehouse.
COGS/expense sub. The subaccount to be used with the COGS account for this warehouse.
Standard cost variance account

The expense account to be used to record differences between the extended standard costs of the stock items received at this warehouse and their extended prices.

This account is used only for transactions associated with stock items for which the standard cost valuation method is assigned.

Standard cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the standard cost variance account.
Standard cost revaluation account

The expense account to be used to record differences between the values of the items at this warehouse when standard costs are updated.

This account is used only for standard-valued stock items.

Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used for this warehouse with the standard cost revaluation account.
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items received to this warehouse, if the option Warehouse is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items.

Whenever receipts based on purchase orders are released, the system generates a transaction between the purchase accrual account and the inventory account.

Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the purchase order items received to this warehouse, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account

The expense account to be used to record any differences between the extended purchase prices of items received at this warehouse on purchase receipts and the extended costs of the items on related supplier invoices.

This account is used for stock items with non-standard cost valuation methods assigned.

Purchase price variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the purchase price variance account for this warehouse.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used to record any differences between the amounts of landed costs on purchase receipts and the amounts of landed costs on purchase invoices for stock items received at this warehouse.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with landed cost variance account for inventory transactions related to this warehouse.
## The Address information tab Use this tab to specify the address of the warehouse and to provide contact information for the warehouse. ### The Contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the warehouse to appear on the documents.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Email The email address of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Web The URL of the web page where information about the warehouse is published.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Phone 2 A secondary phone number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Fax The fax number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
### The Address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line in the address of the warehouse.
Address 2 The second line in the warehouse address.
City The city of the warehouse address.
Country The country where the warehouse is located.
County The county where the warehouse is located.
Postcode The postcode relevant for the warehouse address.
View on map A button that you can use to navigate to an interactive map on the web and view the warehouse location.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Inventory reports /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory reports Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-reports-overview page By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory reports - overview By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. You can also analyse the data by various criteria, and track inventory operations for different warehouses and locations. Many of the reports in this workspace have both summary and detailed versions; you can decide which version best meets your current needs. Because the Inventory workspace is tightly integrated lwith other workspaces, such as Purchases, Inventory, General ledger, and VAT, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the Inventory reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Inventory reports The Inventory workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Inventory balance (IN61500S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s/): Displays detailed, up-to-date information about the quantities and unit costs of stock items at different warehouses and locations. + [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/): For the chosen period, presents detailed information about the beginning and ending quantities of stock items at different warehouses and locations. + [Inventory valuation (IN61550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/): Displays information about the quantities on hand and the total cost of inventory by inventory account, with details for different warehouses. + [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/): For the chosen period, displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses change during the period. + [Goods in transit (IN616500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500/): Shows up-to-date information about the goods in transit, their total quantities, and their total cost. + [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/): Displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected aging date. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### Stocktaking + [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/): Generates stocktaking sheets for the selected stocktacking. + [Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500/): Lists the stock items included into stocktacking, and displays the book quantities and the count results for the items. ### Window + [Assembly confirmation (IN30702S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-confirmation-in30702s/) + [Assembly picklist (IN30701S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-picklist-in30701s/) + [Stock item labels (IN619200)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/): Generates labels for stock items received according to a particular receipt. + [Location labels (IN619000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/): Generates labels for locations within specific warehouse with stock item or item class specified. ### Audit + [Preview standard cost change (IN617500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500/): Gives you estimates of the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you perform updating of the standard costs of the items. + [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/): Displays the list of all open inventory documents to be posted to the specified financial period. + [Inventory register (IN61400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s/): Presents up-to-date, detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). + [Inventory list summary (IN610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-summary-in610500/): Displays current summary information about unreleased inventory documents: receipts, issues, adjustments, and transfers. + [Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s/): Displays up-to-date summary information about every generated inventory document (receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer). + [Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s/) + [Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/unreleased-inventory-documents-in656000/) Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-confirmation-in30702s section Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. You can select a template, or manually make selections that affect the information collected. And, finally, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the finished report. ## The Report parameters tab Here, you can select the reference number of the kit assembly document you want to make a confirmation report for.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Windows

Assembly picklist (IN30701S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-picklist-in30701s section Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assembly picklist (IN30701S) Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. You can select a template, or manually make selections that affect the information collected. And, finally, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the finished report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering series specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Windows

Items by item class (IN408000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000 section In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Items by item class (IN408000) In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This report is only displayed if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. You can select a particular item and view the item class to which it belongs. You can also review the entire list of items that belong to a particular item class: either the items that belong to only the selected item class or the items that belong to the selected item class and to child item classes. Also, you can move items from one item class to another. ## What to do from this window ## The Item class level tree pane In this pane, you can view the hierarchy of item classes that are defined in the system, and click any item class to view its items. The number of nested levels is defined by the configuration of the INITEMCLASS segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window.
Element Description
Class ID The ID of the item class for which the items belonging to the class are listed in the right pane. You can select an ID manually in this field, or if you click an item class in the tree, the field will be filled in with the item class you have clicked.
## The right pane By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your needs for information. ### The top part
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item for which you want to view the item class to which it belongs.
Only related to the current item class If this button is selected, the table shows only the items of the item class selected in the Class ID field.
Related to the current and child item classes If this button is selected, the table shows the items of the item class selected in the Class ID field along with the items of the child item classes of the selected item class.
### The Items in the item class table
Column Description
check box An unlabelled check box that you select to move the selected row to another item class if you click Cut selected records in the table toolbar.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Description The item description.
Item class The ID of the item class to which the item belongs.
Description The item class description.
Item status The status of the item.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Inventory balance (IN61500S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s section The Inventory balance report displays up-to-date information about the stock items stocked at different warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory balance (IN61500S) The Inventory balance report displays up-to-date information about the stock items stocked at different warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The information includes the warehouse ID, unit cost, quantity on hand, unavailable quantity, quantity of expired items, and available quantity. The stock items are listed by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Location details

If you select this check box, the system includes warehouse location details in the report.

Note

This field only appears if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Allocation details A check box that you select to include in the report allocation information for each combination of item ID, subitem, and warehouse ID.
Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch for which you want to view inventory balance information. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to include information on all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s section This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. The report is available in two formats: summary and detail. For the summary format, only the quantities of stock items are shown for each type of operation performed with this stock item within the selected period. For the detailed format, the report displays the details of the transactions performed with the stock items during the selected period. The data in both report formats is grouped by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format to be used for the report: Summary or Enter the item ID.
Company The company the report will cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to include information on all companies.
Branch The branch for which you want to view historical inventory balance information.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Inventory valuation (IN61550S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s section This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory valuation (IN61550S) This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + inventory account + different warehouses The report is available in two formats: + summary + detail. The report in the summary format displays only summary data for each warehouse. The detailed report displays information about the operations performed for each stock item in each warehouse; it includes the beginning and ending quantities and costs, and the reference numbers of the relevant inventory documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Report format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Enter the item ID.
Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Inventory valuation by location (IN61551S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-by-location-in61551s section This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory valuation by location (IN61551S) This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + inventory account + different warehouses + locations. The report is available in two formats: + summary + detail. The report in the summary format displays only summary data for each warehouse. The detailed report displays information about the operations performed for each stock item in each warehouse; it includes the beginning and ending quantities and costs, and the reference numbers of the relevant inventory documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}
Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s section This report displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses have changed in the selected time interval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) This report displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses have changed in the selected time interval. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report is available in two formats: summary and detail. In the summary format, the report displays summary data for each inventory account/subaccount resulting from operations with stock items. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Enter item ID.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Company The company for which the report should include data. Select a company to view only data for this company, or leave the field blank to view data from all companies. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch for which the report should include data. Select a branch to view only data for this branch, or leave the field blank to view data from all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s section This report shows a summary of the value of all accounts and subaccounts in the inventory. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) This report shows a summary of the value of all accounts and subaccounts in the inventory. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It tells you what account the transactions have been made in, as well as the beginning and end cost for the period you select. You can also choose to view a detailed summary, where the transactions and cost per account will be grouped by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Details.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Company The company for which the report should include data. Select a company to view only data for this company, or leave the field blank to view data from all companies. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch for which the report should include data. Select a branch to view only data for this branch, or leave the field blank to view data from all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Goods in transit (IN616500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500 section The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Goods in transit (IN616500) The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This report is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. These are the items that were transferred to other warehouses in two steps and were not yet received at the destination warehouse. The report is available in two formats: summary and detailed. The summary format shows only the quantities of the stock items in transit. The detailed format provides detailed information about each transit operation with a reference to the original transfer document. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Detailed.
Dest. warehouse ID The destination warehouse the report will cover. Select a destination warehouse ID to limit the data displayed in the report to only the items in transit transferred to this destination warehouse; leave the field blank to view data for all destination warehouses.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Transfer no. The number of the transfer.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000 section This report displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected ageing date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) This report displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected ageing date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The expiration dates are displayed for only stock items whose lot/serial class has the **Track expiration date** option selected. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ageing date The ageing date. Select a date to view only the stock items having an expiration date before or equal to the selected ageing date; leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Expired items only A check box that you select to limit the data displayed in the report to only expired stock items.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view on only the stock items available on this location, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Location

The location for which data will be displayed.

Select a location to view only data, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Item ID The stock item the report will cover. Select an item ID to view data on only this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Serial number The serial number the report will cover. Select a serial number to view only data for this serial number, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500 section This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. You run this report to preview and print the sheets for stocktaking count to be used to enter the data during stocktaking. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no The reference number of the stocktaking document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500 section This report lists the stock items included into stocktaking, and displays the book quantities and count results for the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) This report lists the stock items included into stocktaking, and displays the book quantities and count results for the items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no The reference number of the stocktaking document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Stock item labels (IN619200) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200 section This report displays the labels generated for the inventory received according to a particular receipt. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stock item labels (IN619200) This report displays the labels generated for the inventory received according to a particular receipt. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each label includes the name of the warehouse, the location where the item of inventory is stored, the item ID and description, the inventory receipt reference number, the date of receipt, and the lot/serial number for this item. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Receipt ref. number The reference number of a particular receipt. Select a reference number to view and print labels for this inventory receipt.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Location labels (IN619000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000 section This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Location labels (IN619000) This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. (The primary item is the item that is issued or received the most often or stored at this location in the highest volumes.) This report uses data from the **Location table** tab of the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. Use this report to preview and print the location labels for a warehouse or all warehouses. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Warehouse The warehouse the report will cover. Select a warehouse to display and print only the labels for it, or leave the field blank to display and print labels for all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Preview standard cost change (IN617500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500 section By using this report, you can estimate the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you update the standard cost of the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview standard cost change (IN617500) By using this report, you can estimate the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you update the standard cost of the items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report displays the quantity on hand, current standard cost, effective date, pending cost, pending date, total cost, cost change, and pending total for each stock item listed in the report. It also shows the total cost, cost change, and pending total for the warehouse. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Pending date The latest date for pending cost dates; the report will include the cost changes up to the date selected in this field.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/unreleased-inventory-documents-in656000 section By using this report, you can view and print a list of open inventory documents that were to be posted in the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000) By using this report, you can view and print a list of open inventory documents that were to be posted in the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Inventory register (IN61400S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s section This report shows you detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory register (IN61400S) This report shows you detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It provides details about each document, including lot and serial numbers assigned to units of the stock items involved in the operations, and the accounts and subaccounts whose balances are updated by these operations. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. Select a financial period, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Document type The document type the report will cover. Select a document type to view the information only on documents with this type, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Reference no.

The reference number of the document for which you want to view data.

Select a number to view detailed data on only this document, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Inventory list summary (IN610500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-summary-in610500 section This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory list summary (IN610500) This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. Use this report to view who prepared and modified documents. The report displays the following data: document type, reference number, document date and period, status of the document, name of the person who created and modified the document, and total quantity and total amount of the operation. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The starting financial period for the report.
To period The ending financial period for the report.
Created by The user that created the documents to be viewed in the report.
Last modified by The user that last modified the documents to be viewed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s section This report displays detailed information about released inventory documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) This report displays detailed information about released inventory documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use it to view document dates, amounts, and user names of the persons who created and modified the documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The document type the report will cover. Select a document type to view the information only on documents with this type, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Reference no.

The reference number of the document for which you want to view data.

Select a number to view detailed data on only this document, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

From period The financial period from which you want to view information. The default is the current period.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information. The default is the current period.
Created by The user who has created the list.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the list.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows